LS4208
Product Reference Guide

LS4208 Product Reference Guide
72E-69413-03 Revision A January 2007

© 2005-2007 by Symbol Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing from Symbol. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to change without notice. The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Symbol grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Symbol. The user agrees to maintain Symbol’s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof. Symbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design. Symbol does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein. No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies, Inc., intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Symbol products. Symbol, Spectrum One, and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc. Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged. Symbol Technologies, Inc. One Symbol Plaza Holtsville, New York 11742-1300 http://www.symbol.com

Revision History
Changes to the original manual are listed below:
Change 72E-69413-01 72E-69413-02 72E-69413-03 Date 5/2005 6/2005 1/2007 Initial release. Update RSS description. Update service section, add special IBM command bar codes, add parameter bar codes for Bookland ISBN format and new UPC supplemental decode options, add bar codes for report version, report MIMIC version, and report Synapse cable, add ADF section. Description

Contents
About This Guide
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Chapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv Related Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Chapter 1. Getting Started
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Setting Up the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Installing the Interface Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Removing the Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Connecting Power (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Configuring the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Chapter 2. Scanning
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Beeper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Scanning in Hands-Free Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Assemble the Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

vi LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Scanning with Intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Chapter 3. Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Scanner Signal Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8

Chapter 4. User Preferences
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 User Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 User Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Default Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Beeper Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Beeper Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Scan Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Scan Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Laser On Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Beep After Good Decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9

Chapter 5. Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 Keyboard Wedge Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 Intra-Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Caps Lock On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Caps Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Convert Wedge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 FN1 Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Send Make and Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Keyboard Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Chapter 6. RS-232 Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Contents vii

Connecting an RS-232 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 RS-232 Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 RS-232 Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5 RS-232 Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8 Parity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9 Stop Bit Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Data Bits (ASCII Format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Check Receive Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Hardware Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Software Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Host Serial Response Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 RTS Line State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Beep on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Intercharacter Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17 Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18

Chapter 7. USB Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Connecting a USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 USB Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 USB Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 USB Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 USB Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 USB CAPS Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 USB Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 Emulate Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Simulated Caps Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 Convert Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 ASCII Character Set for USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

Chapter 8. IBM Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 IBM Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Port Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Convert Unknown to Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Optional IBM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Ignore Beep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Ignore Bar Code Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

viii LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Chapter 9. Wand Emulation Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Connecting Using Wand Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 Wand Emulation Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Wand Emulation Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6 Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Chapter 10. Scanner Emulation Interface
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Connecting Using Scanner Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Scanner Emulation Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Scanner Emulation Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Beep Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Parameter Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Convert Newer Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Module Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Leading Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Check For Decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10

Chapter 11. 123Scan
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Communication with 123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3 123Scan Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3

Chapter 12. Symbologies
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 Symbology Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 UPC/EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7 Enable/Disable UPC-A/UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7 Enable/Disable UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8 Enable/Disable EAN-13/EAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8 Enable/Disable Bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13

Contents ix

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13 Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14 UPC-A Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14 UPC-E Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15 UPC-E1 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-16 Convert UPC-E to UPC-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-16 Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-17 EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-17 Bookland ISBN Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-18 UCC Coupon Extended Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-18 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-19 Enable/Disable Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-19 Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-19 Enable/Disable ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-20 Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Enable/Disable Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Convert Code 39 to Code 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-22 Code 32 Prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-22 Set Lengths for Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23 Code 39 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-24 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-24 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25 Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25 Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Enable/Disable Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Set Lengths for Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Set Lengths for Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Code 11 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-35 Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36 Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Chinese 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-39 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-39 Codabar (NW - 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 Enable/Disable Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 Set Lengths for Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 CLSI Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-41 NOTIS Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-42

x LS4208 Product Reference Guide

MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 Enable/Disable MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 Set Lengths for MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 MSI Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-44 Transmit MSI Check Digit(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45 MSI Check Digit Algorithm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45 RSS (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-46 Convert RSS to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-47 Symbology - Specific Security Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48 Redundancy Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48 Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-50 Intercharacter Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-51 Report Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Report MIMIC Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Report Synapse Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52

Chapter 13. Miscellaneous Scanner Options
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Miscellaneous Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Transmit Code ID Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Prefix/Suffix Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Scan Data Transmission Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 FN1 Substitution Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8 Transmit “No Read” Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8 Synapse Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9

Chapter 14. Advanced Data Formatting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Using ADF Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 ADF Bar Code Menu Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Alternate Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Default Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Special Considerations for Multipoint Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Special Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Pause Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 Begin New Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 Save Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8 Quit Entering Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8 Disable Rule Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9 Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10

Contents xi

Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10 Code Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13 Message Containing A Specific Data String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17 Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20 Send Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20 Setup Field(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 Modify Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-28 Pad Data with Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-29 Pad Data with Zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-37 Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38 Send Right Control Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-70 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-70 Turn On/Off Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-76 Alphanumeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-77

Appendix A. Standard Default Parameters Appendix B. Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 AIM Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Appendix C. Sample Bar Codes
Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPC/EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPC-A, 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EAN-13, 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 C-4 C-4 C-4 C-5

Appendix D. Numeric Bar Codes
Numeric Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

Appendix E. ASCII Character Sets Index

xii LS4208 Product Reference Guide

About This Guide
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Chapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv Related Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

xiv LS4208 Product Reference Guide

xv

Introduction
The LS4208 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the LS4208 scanner. The scanner includes the following variations of the scanner:

Chapter Descriptions
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Chapter 1, Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection information. Chapter 2, Scanning describes parts of the scanner, beeper and LED definitions, and how to use the scanner in hand-held and hands-free modes. Chapter 3, Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the scanner, troubleshooting, and technical specifications. Chapter 4, User Preferences provides programming bar codes for selecting user preference features for the scanner. Chapter 5, Keyboard Wedge Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for Keyboard Wedge operation. Chapter 6, RS-232 Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for RS-232 operation. Chapter 7, USB Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for USB operation. Chapter 8, IBM Interface provides all information for setting up the scanner with IBM 468X/469X POS systems. Chapter 9, Wand Emulation Interface provides all information for setting up the scanner for Wand Emulation operation. Chapter 10, Scanner Emulation Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for Scanner Emulation operation. Chapter 11, 123Scan (PC based scanner configuration tool) provides the bar code that must be scanned to communicate with the 123Scan program. Chapter 12, Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features for the scanner. Chapter 13, Miscellaneous Scanner Options includes commonly used bar codes to customize how the data is transmitted to the host device. Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting details Advanced Data Formatting (ADF), a means of customizing data before transmission to a host device. Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous scanner defaults. Appendix B, Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions, and keyboard maps. Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes. Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric values. Appendix E, ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables.

Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document: • Bullets (•) indicate: • action items • lists of alternatives • lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential. Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.

•

xvi LS4208 Product Reference Guide

•

Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) are used to denote default parameter settings.

* Indicates Default

*Baud Rate 9600

Feature/Option

Related Publications
The LS4208 Quick Reference Guide (p/n 72-69411-xx) provides general information to help the user get started with the scanner. It includes basic operation instructions and start up bar codes. For the latest versions of the LS4208 Quick Reference Guide and the LS4208 Product Reference Guide go to: http://www.symbol.com/manuals.

Service Information
If there is a problem with the equipment, contact the regional Global Customer Interaction Center. For contact number information, visit: www.symbol.com/contactsupport for a Customer Interaction Center in your area. Before calling, have the model number, serial number and several bar code symbols at hand. Call the Global Customer Interaction Center from a phone near the scanning equipment so that the service person can try to troubleshoot the problem. If the equipment is found to be working properly and the problem is reading bar codes, the Support Center will request samples of the bar codes for analysis at our plant. If the problem cannot be solved over the phone, it may be necessary to return the equipment for servicing. If that is necessary, the Global Customer Interaction Center will provide specific directions. Symbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. If the original shipping container was not kept, contact Symbol to have another sent.

Note

If the Symbol product was purchased from a Symbol Business Partner, contact that Business Partner for service.

Getting Started
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Setting Up the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Installing the Interface Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Removing the Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Connecting Power (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Configuring the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Getting Started 1-3

Introduction
The scanner combines excellent scanning performance and advanced ergonomics to provide the best value in a lightweight laser scanner. Whether used as a hand-held scanner or in hands-free mode in a stand, the scanner ensures comfort and ease of use for extended periods of time. In addition to single-line laser scanning, the scanner supports multi-line rastering. Multi-line rastering allows the scanner to capture stacked RSS codes and increases angular tolerances, minimizing product orientation and hand movements. Multi-line rastering also allows the scanner to read poor quality bar codes. For more information about scanning modes and stacked RSS codes, see Scan Pattern on page 4-7 and RSS on page C-4. The scanner does not currently support PDF217 bar codes and its variants.

Figure 1-1. LS4208 Scanner
This scanner supports the following interfaces: • Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. This interface supports the following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese. Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan bar code menus to set up proper communication of the scanner with the host. USB connection to a host. The scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus.This interface supports the following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese. Connection to IBM® 468X/469X hosts. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the scanner with the IBM terminal. Wand Emulation connection to a host. The scanner is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller, or host which collects the data as wand data and decodes it. Scanner Emulation connection to a host. The scanner is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host. Synapse capability which allows connection to a wide variety of host systems using a Synapse and Synapse adapter cable. The scanner autodetects the host. Configuration via 123Scan.

• •

• • • • •

1-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Unpacking
Remove the scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the scanner was damaged in transit, call the Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center. See page xvi for contact information. KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment ever needs to be return for servicing.

Setting Up the Scanner
Installing the Interface Cable
To connect the interface cable: 1. Insert the interface cable’s modular connector clip into the cable interface port on the bottom of the scanner handle. (See Figure 1-2.). 2. Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is properly secured. 3. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host. (See the specific host chapter for information on host connections.)

Cable interface port

Interface cable modular connector

Interface cable modular connector clip

To host

Figure 1-2. Installing the Cable
Different cables are required for different hosts. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only. Actual connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same.

Getting Started 1-5

Removing the Interface Cable
To remove the interface cable: 1. Unplug the installed cable’s modular connector by depressing the connector clip with the tip of a screwdriver. 2. Carefully slide out the cable. 3. Follow the steps for Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4 to connect a new cable.

Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface
Refer to the Synapse Interface Guide provided with the Synapse cable for detailed setup instructions.

Symbol’s Synapse Smart Cables enable interfacing to a variety of hosts. The appropriate Synapse cable has the built-in intelligence to detect the host to which it is connected.
To host

Synapse Adapter Cable Synapse Smart Cable To Scanner

Figure 1-3. Synapse Cable Connection
1. Plug the Synapse adapter cable (p/n 25-32463-xx) into the bottom of the scanner, as described in Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4. 2. Align the ‘S’ on the Synapse adapter cable with the ‘S’ on the Synapse Smart Cable and plug the cable in. 3. Connect the other end of the Synapse Smart Cable to the host.

Connecting Power (if required)
If the host does not provide power to the scanner, an external power connection to the scanner is required. To connect power: 1. Connect the interface cable to the bottom of the scanner, as described in Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4. 2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port). 3. Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end of the power supply into an AC outlet.

Configuring the Scanner
To configure the scanner, use the bar codes included in this manual, or the 123Scan configuration program. See Chapter 4, User Preferences, Chapter 12, Symbologies and Chapter 13, Miscellaneous Scanner Options for information about programming the scanner using bar code menus. Also see each host-specific chapter to set up a connection to a specific host type. See Chapter 11, 123Scan to configure the scanner using this configuration program. A help file is available in the program.

1-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Scanning
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Beeper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Scanning in Hands-Free Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Assemble the Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Scanning with Intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Decode Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Scanning 2-3

Introduction
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar codes, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode zone diagrams.

LED Scan Window

Beeper

Trigger

Figure 2-1. Parts

2-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Beeper Definitions
The scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status. Table 2-1 defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the scanner.

Table 2-1. Beeper Definitions
Beeper Sequence Standard Use Low/medium/high beeps Short high beeps 4 long low beeps 5 low beeps Low/high/low beeps High/high/high/low beeps Parameter Menu Scanning Short high beeps Low/high beeps High/low beeps High/low/high/low beeps Low/high/low/high beeps Code 39 Buffering High/low beeps 3 Beeps - long high beeps Low/high/low beeps Low/high beeps Host Specific USB only 4 short high beeps Scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again. New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer. Code 39 buffer is full. The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer. A successful transmission of buffered data. Correct entry scanned or correct menu sequence performed. Input error, incorrect bar code or “Cancel” scanned, wrong entry, incorrect bar code programming sequence; remain in program mode. Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using bar code keypad. Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting. Out of host parameter storage space. Scan Default Parameters on page 4-5. Power up. A bar code symbol was decoded (if decode beeper is enabled). A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting. Conversion or format error. Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) transmit error. See Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting. RS-232 receive error. Indication

Scanner gives a power-up beep after scanning a USB Device Type. Communication with the bus must be established before the scanner can operate at the highest power level. This power-up beep occurs more than once. RS-232 only 1 short high beep A character is received and Beep on is enabled. The USB bus may put the scanner in a state where power to the scanner is cycled on and off more than once. This is normal and usually happens when the host cold boots.

Scanning 2-5

LED Definitions
In addition to beeper sequences, the scanner communicates with the user using a two-color LED display. Table 2-2 defines LED colors that display during scanning.

Table 2-2. Standard LED Definitions
LED Off Green Red Indication No power is applied to the scanner, or the scanner is on and ready to scan. A bar code was successfully decoded. A data transmission error or scanner malfunction occurred.

Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
Install and program the scanner (see Setting Up the Scanner on page 1-4). For assistance, contact the Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center. See page xvi for contact information. To scan in hand-held mode: 1. Ensure all connections are secure. (See the host chapter for the scanner.) 2. Aim the scanner at the bar code. 3. Press the trigger.

Single-Line Mode

Multi-Line Raster Mode

Figure 2-2. Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
4. Upon successful decode, the scanner beeps and the LED turns green. (For more information about beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.) Scan line lengths vary depending on the scan line width selected (see Scan Line Width on page 4-8). A full scan line width is the default. Medium and short scan line widths are useful for scanning menus or pick-lists.

2-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Aiming
On a typical UPC 100% hold the scanner between contact and 19 inches from the symbol (see Decode Zone on page 2-10). When scanning using a single-line scan mode, ensure the scan line crosses every bar and space of the symbol.

012345

012345

Figure 2-3. Acceptable and Incorrect Single-Line Aiming
When scanning using a multi-line scan mode, at least one scan line must cross every bar and space of the symbol.

012345

012345

Figure 2-4. Acceptable and Incorrect Multi-Line Aiming
Regardless of the scan mode, the scan line is smaller when the scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the scanner, and those with larger bars or elements (mil size) farther from the scanner. Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. Laser light reflecting directly back into the scanner from the bar code is known as specular reflection. This specular reflection can make decoding difficult. Scan line lengths vary depending on the scan line width selected. A full scan line width is the default. Medium and short scan line widths are useful for scanning menus or pick-lists. For more information about scan line widths and scanning modes, see page 4-7 and page 4-8, respectively.

Scanning 2-7

The scanner can be tilted up to 65° forward or back and achieve a successful decode (Figure 2-5). Simple practice quickly shows what tolerances to work within.

65

o

65

o

Figure 2-5. Maximum Tilt Angles and Dead Zone

2-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Scanning in Hands-Free Mode
The optional Intellistand adds greater flexibility to scanning operation. When the scanner is seated in the stand’s “cup,” the scanner’s built-in sensor places the scanner in hands-free mode. When the scanner is removed from the stand, it automatically switches modes to operate in its normal hand-held triggered mode.

Assemble the Stand

Figure 2-6. Assembling Intellistand

Scanning 2-9

Scanning with Intellistand
When the scanner is placed in the Intellistand, the scan pattern selected in hand-held triggered mode continues (see Scan Pattern on page 4-7). To operate the scanner in Intellistand: 1. Ensure the scanner is properly connected to the host (see the appropriate host chapter for information on host connections). 2. Insert the scanner in Intellistand by placing the front of the scanner into the stand’s “cup.”

Cup Scanner Holder Angle Adjustment Knob

Height Adjustment Knob

Figure 2-7. Inserting the Scanner in the Intellistand
3. Use the Intellistand’s adjustment knobs to adjust the height and angle of the scanner. 4. Present the bar code. When the bar code is in view, the scanner emits a full scan line. After 3 minutes, the scanner automatically switches to a reduced scan line. After 1 hour, the scanner automatically switches to blink mode.

5. Upon successful decode, the scanner beeps and the LED turns green. For more information about beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.

2-10

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Decode Zone

in. 15
Note: Typical performance at 73° F (23° C) on high quality symbols in normal room light.

cm 38.1

10

25.4

5

12.7

W i d t h o f F i e l d

LS 4208

0

0

5 5 mil 10 mil

12.7

1.5

5.5 10 14.5 19 29 25.4

*

13 mil 20 mil

15

38.1

in. 0 cm 0

5 12.7

10 25.4

15 38.1

20 50.8 Depth of Field

25 63.5

30 76.2

35 88.9

40 101.6

*Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle

Figure 2-8. LS4208 Decode Zone

Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Scanner Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

3-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3-3

Introduction
This chapter provides suggested scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts).

Maintenance
Cleaning the exit window is the only maintenance required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy. • • • • Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window.

Troubleshooting
Table 3-1. Troubleshooting
Problem Beeper Indications The scanner emits frequent beeps. No power to the scanner. Incorrect host interface cable is used. Interface/power cables are loose. Scanner emits low/high/low beeps. ADF transmit error. Invalid ADF rule is detected. Scanner emits low/high beeps. Scanner emits low/high/low beeps. Input error, incorrect bar code or Cancel bar code was scanned. The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer. Out of host parameter storage space. Out of memory for ADF rules. Scanner emits high/low beeps. Scanner emits high/high/high/low beeps. Scanner emits four long low beeps. Scanner emits four short high beeps (USB only). Scanner emits a short low/high/low/high beep sequence while it is being programmed. The scanner is buffering Code 39 data. RS-232 receive error. A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. Scanner has not completed initialization. Out of ADF parameter storage space. Check the system power. If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply. Verify that the correct host interface cable is used. If not, connect the correct host interface cable. Check for loose cable connections and re-connect cables. See Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting. See Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting. Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for the parameter programmed. Normal when scanning the Code 39 Buffering Clear Buffer bar code or upon attempt to transmit an empty Code 39 buffer. Scan Default Parameters on page 4-5. Reduce the number of ADF rules or the number of steps in the ADF rules. Normal. Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the scanner's RS-232 parity to match the host setting. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting. Wait several seconds and scan again. Erase all rules and re-program with shorter rules. Possible Causes Possible Solutions

Scanner emits low/high/low/high beeps.

3-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Decoding Bar Codes Scanner emits the laser, but does not decode the bar Scanner is not programmed for the correct bar code Program the scanner to read that type of bar code. code. type. See Chapter 12, Symbologies. Bar code symbol is unreadable. Distance between scanner and bar code is incorrect. Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to determine if the bar code is defaced. Move the scanner closer to or further from the bar code. See Decode Zone on page 2-10. Possible Causes Possible Solutions

The scan line is not crossing every bar and space of Move the symbol until the scan line is within the the symbol. acceptable aiming pattern. See Figure 2-3 on page 26. Scanner decodes bar code, but does not transmit the Scanner is not programmed for the correct host type. data to the host. Interface cable is loose. Scanner emits five long low beep after a bar code is Conversion or format error was detected. decoded. The scanner’s conversion parameters are not properly configured. Conversion or format error was detected. An ADF rule was set up with characters that can't be sent for the host selected. Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code. See the chapter corresponding to the host type. Check for loose cable connection and re-connect cable. Ensure the scanner’s conversion parameters are properly configured. Change the ADF rule, or change to a host that can support the ADF rule.

Change the bar code, or change to a host that can Conversion or format error was detected. A bar code was scanned with characters that can't support the bar code. be sent for that host. Host Displays Host displays scanned data incorrectly. Scanner is not programmed to work with the host. Ensure the proper host is selected. Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code. For RS-232, set the scanner's communication parameters to match the host's settings. For a USB HID keyboard or Keyboard Wedge configuration, program the system for the correct keyboard type and language, and turn off the CAPS LOCK key. Program the proper editing options (e.g., ADF, UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion). Check the scanner’s host type parameters or editing options. Trigger Nothing happens when the trigger is pulled. No power to the scanner. Interface/power cables are loose. Check the system power. If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply. Check for loose cable connections and re-connect cables.

Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3-5

Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Check the system power. If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply. Verify that the correct host interface cable is used. If not, connect the correct host interface cable. Check for loose cable connections and re-connect cables. The laser does not appear when the trigger is pulled. No power to the scanner. Incorrect host interface cable is used. Interface/power cables are loose.

If after performing these checks the symbol still does not scan, contact the distributor or the Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center. See page xvi for contact information.

3-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Technical Specifications
Table 3-2. Technical Specifications
Item Physical Characteristics Dimensions: Weight (without cable) Voltage & Current Color Performance Characteristics Light Source (Laser) Motor Frequency Decode Rate Roll Tolerance Pitch Tolerance Yaw Tolerance Nominal Working Distance 650nm laser diode 50Hz 200 decodes per second ± 35° ± 60° ± 60° 13 mil (100% UPC/EAN): 0 to 19 in. (48.25 cm) 5 mil (Code 39): 1.5 to 5.5 in. (3.8 cm to 13.97 cm) (See Decode Zone on page 2-10) 25% minimum reflectance At 5 in. reading distance: ~ 0.5 in. (1.3 cm) At 10 in. reading distance: ~ 1 in. (2.5 cm) Horizontal Velocity: 200 in. (508 cm) / sec Vertical Velocity: 200 in. (508 cm) / sec Angular Velocity: 200 in. (508 cm) / sec UPC/EAN and with supplementals, Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Trioptic Code 39, RSS Variants, UCC/EAN 128, Code 128, Code 128 Full ASCII, Code 93, Codabar (NW1), Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5 MSI, Codell, IATA, Bookland EAN, Code 32 RS-232C (Standard, Nixdorf, ICL, & Fujitsu); IBM 468x/469x; Keyboard Wedge; USB (Standard, IBM SurePOS, Macintosh); Laser/Wand Emulation. Synapse Adaptive Connectivity allows for connectivity to interfaces above and many nonstandard interfaces. 6.7 in. H x 3.7 in. L x 2.7 in. W (17 cm H x 9.3 cm L x 6.8 cm W) Approximately 6.4 oz. (181 g) 5 +/-10%VDC @ 140 mA (Stand by: .

Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set
ASCII Value 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027
1

Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character $A $B $C $D $E $F $G $H $I $J $K $L $M $N $O $P $Q $R $S $T $U $V $W $X $Y $Z %A

Keystroke CTRL A CTRL B CTRL C CTRL D CTRL E CTRL F CTRL G CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1 CTRL J CTRL K CTRL L CTRL M/ENTER1 CTRL N CTRL O CTRL P CTRL Q CTRL R CTRL S CTRL T CTRL U CTRL V CTRL W CTRL X CTRL Y CTRL Z CTRL [ /ESC1

The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.

5-14

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 keystroke is sent. Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character %B %C %D %E Space /A /B /C /D /E /F /G /H /I /J /K /L . /O 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 /Z %F %G Keystroke CTRL \ CTRL ] CTRL 6 CTRL Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; <

1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded

Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-15

Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 keystroke is sent. Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character %H %I %J %V A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z %K %L %M Keystroke = > ? @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ]

1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded

5-16

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 keystroke is sent. Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character %N %O %W +A +B +C +D +E +F +G +H +I +J +K +L +M +N +O +P +Q +R +S +T +U +V +W +X +Y +Z %P %Q %R %S Keystroke ^ _ ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded

Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-17

Table 5-3. Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 Keystroke ALT A ALT B ALT C ALT D ALT E ALT F ALT G ALT H ALT I ALT J ALT K ALT L ALT M ALT N ALT O ALT P ALT Q ALT R ALT S ALT T ALT U ALT V ALT W ALT X ALT Y ALT Z

Table 5-4. Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set
GUI Keys 3000 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 Keystrokes Right Control Key GUI 0 GUI 1 GUI 2 GUI 3 GUI 4

5-18

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 5-4. Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Keys 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 Keystrokes GUI 5 GUI 6 GUI 7 GUI 8 GUI 9 GUI A GUI B GUI C GUI D GUI E GUI F GUI G GUI H GUI I GUI J GUI K GUI L GUI M GUI N GUI O GUI P GUI Q GUI R GUI S GUI T GUI U GUI V GUI W GUI X GUI Y GUI Z

Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-19

Table 5-5. Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set
F Keys 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 Keystroke F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24

Table 5-6. Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set
Numeric Keypad 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 Keystroke * + undefined . /

5-20

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 5-6. Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set (Continued)
Numeric Keypad 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 Keystroke 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Enter Num Lock

Table 5-7. Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set
Extended Keypad 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 Keystroke Break Delete Pg Up End Pg Dn Pause Scroll Lock Backspace Tab Print Screen Insert Home Enter Escape Up Arrow Dn Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow

RS-232 Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Connecting an RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 RS-232 Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 RS-232 Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 RS-232 Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Parity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Stop Bit Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Data Bits (ASCII Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Check Receive Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Hardware Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Software Handshaking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Host Serial Response Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 RTS Line State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Beep on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Intercharacter Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17 Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18

6-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

RS-232 Interface 6-3

Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host. The RS-232 interface is used to connect the scanner to pointof-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port). If the host is not listed in Table 6-2, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication parameters to match the host. The scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Symbol offers different cables providing TTL-to-RS-232C conversion. Contact the Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center for more information. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).

Note

* Indicates Default

*Baud Rate 57,600

Feature/Option

Connecting an RS-232 Interface
This connection is made directly from the scanner to the host computer.

Interface Cable Serial Port Connector to Host

Power Supply Cable

Figure 6-1. RS-232 Direct Connection
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 6-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same.

1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host. 3. Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power supply into an appropriate outlet. 4. Select the RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS-232 Host Types on page 6-7. 5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.

6-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

RS-232 Parameter Defaults
Table 6-1 lists the defaults for RS-232 host parameters. If any option needs to be changed, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 6-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 6-1. RS-232 Host Default Table
Parameter RS-232 Host Parameters RS-232 Host Types Baud Rate Parity Type Stop Bit Select Data Bits (ASCII Format) Check Receive Errors Hardware Handshaking Software Handshaking Host Serial Response Time-out RTS Line State Beep on Intercharacter Delay Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Ignore Unknown Characters Standard 9600 None 1 Stop Bit 8-Bit Enable None None 2 Sec Low RTS Disable 0 msec Normal Operation Send Bar Code 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-17 Default Page Number

RS-232 Interface 6-5

RS-232 Host Parameters
Various RS-232 hosts are set up with their own parameter default settings (Table 6-2). Selecting the ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, Olivetti, Omron, or terminal sets the defaults listed below.

Table 6-2. Terminal Specific RS-232
Standard (Default) No Data as is Yes Data/Suffix WincorNixdorf Mode A Yes Data/Suffix CR (1013) 9600 Odd RTS/CTS Option 3 None 9.9 Sec. One 8-Bit Disable Low None Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B/OPOS Yes Data/Suffix CR (1013) 9600 Odd RTS/CTS Option 3 None 9.9 Sec. One 8-Bit Disable Low = No data to send None Yes

Parameter Transmit Code ID Data Transmission Format Suffix Baud Rate Parity Hardware Handshaking Software Handshaking Serial Response Time-out Stop Bit Select ASCII Format Beep On RTS Line State Prefix

ICL

Fujitsu Yes Data/Suffix CR (1013) 9600 None None None 2 Sec. One 8-Bit Disable Low None

Olivetti Yes

Omron

Prefix/Data/Suffix Data/Suffix ETX (1002) 9600 Even None Ack/Nak 9.9 Sec. One 7-Bit Disable Low STX (1003) CR (1013) 9600 None None None 9.9 Sec. One 8-Bit Disable High None

CR/LF (7013) CR (1013) 9600 None None None 2 Sec. One 8-Bit Disable Low None 9600 Even RTS/CTS Option 3 None 9.9 Sec. One 8-Bit Disable High None

*In the Nixdorf Mode B, if CTS is Low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is High, the user can scan bar codes. **If Nixdorf Mode B is scanned without the scanner connected to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the scanner.

6-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

RS-232 Host Parameters (continued)
Selecting the ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS terminal enables the transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 6-3 below. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. The Transmit Code ID feature should not be enabled for these terminals.

Table 6-3. Terminal Specific Code ID Characters
ICL UPC-A UPC-E EAN-8/JAN-8 EAN-13/JAN-13 Code 39 Codabar Code 128 I 2 of 5 Code 93 D 2 of 5 UCC/EAN 128 MSI Bookland EAN Trioptic Code 11 IATA Code 32 A E FF F C N L I None H L None F None None H None A E FF F None None None None None None None None F None None None None Fujitsu Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A A C B A M N K I L H P O A None None H None A C B A M N K I L H P O A None None H None Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B/OPOS A C B A M N K I L H P O A None None None None Olivetti A E FF F C N L I None H L None F None None None None Omron

RS-232 Interface 6-7

RS-232 Host Types
To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following bar codes.

*Standard RS-232

ICL RS-232

Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A

Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B

Olivetti ORS4500

Omron

OPOS/JPOS

Fujitsu RS-232

6-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.

Baud Rate 600

Baud Rate 1200

Baud Rate 2400

Baud Rate 4800

*Baud Rate 9600

Baud Rate 19,200

Baud Rate 38,400

RS-232 Interface 6-9

Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host device requirements. • • • • • Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character. Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character. Select Mark parity and the parity bit is always 1. Select Space parity and the parity bit is always 0. Select None when no parity bit is required.

Odd

Even

Mark

Space

*None

6-10

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Stop Bit Select
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. The number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements.

*1 Stop Bit

2 Stop Bits

Data Bits (ASCII Format)
This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.

7-Bit

*8-Bit

RS-232 Interface 6-11

Check Receive Errors
Select whether or not the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters are checked. The parity value of received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above.

*Check For Received Errors
(Enable)

Do Not Check For Received Errors (Disable)

Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is not selected, scan data is transmitted as it becomes available. If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is selected, scan data is transmitted according to the following sequence: • The scanner reads the CTS line for activity. If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for the host to de-assert the CTS line. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out, the CTS line is still asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error, and any scanned data is lost. When the CTS line is de-asserted, the scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for the host to assert CTS. When the host asserts CTS, data is transmitted. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error, and discards the data. When data transmission is complete, the scanner de-asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character. The host should respond by negating CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next transmission of data.

•

• •

During the transmission of data, the CTS line should be asserted. If CTS is de-asserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the transmission is aborted, the scanner sounds a transmission error, and the data is discarded. If the above communication sequence fails, the scanner issues an error indication. In this case, the data is lost and must be rescanned. If Hardware Handshaking and Software Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes precedence. The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.

• •

None: Scan the bar code below if no Hardware Handshaking is desired. Standard RTS/CTS: Scan the bar code below to select Standard RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking.

6-12

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

• •

•

RTS/CTS Option 1: When RTS/CTS Option 1 is selected, the scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The scanner de-asserts RTS when the transmission is complete. RTS/CTS Option 2: When Option 2 is selected, RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response Time-out, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. RTS/CTS Option 3: When Option 3 is selected, the scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS. The scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for CTS to be asserted. If CTS is not asserted during this time, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission is complete.

*None

Standard RTS/CTS

RTS/CTS Option 1

RTS/CTS Option 2

RTS/CTS Option 3

RS-232 Interface 6-13

Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware handshaking. There are five options. If Software Handshaking and Hardware Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes precedence. • • None: When this option is selected, data is transmitted immediately. No response is expected from host. ACK/NAK: When this option is selected, after transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host. When a NAK is received, the scanner transmits the same data again and waits for either an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data when NAKs are received, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an ACK or NAK. If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it issues an error indication and discards the data. There are no retries when a time-out occurs. ENQ: When this option is selected, the scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If an ENQ is not received within the Host Serial Response Time-out, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Time-out to prevent transmission errors. ACK/NAK with ENQ: This combines the two previous options. For re-transmissions of data, due to a NAK from the host, an additional ENQ is not required. XON/XOFF: An XOFF character turns the scanner transmission off until the scanner receives an XON character. There are two situations for XON/XOFF: • XOFF is received before the scanner has data to send. When the scanner has data to send, it waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for an XON character before transmission. If the XON is not received within this time, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. • XOFF is received during a transmission. Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte. When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data message. The scanner waits up to 30 seconds for the XON.

•

• •

*None

ACK/NAK

ENQ

6-14

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Software Handshaking (continued)

ACK/NAK with ENQ

XON/XOFF

Host Serial Response Time-out
This parameter specifies how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, ENQ, XON, or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred.

*Minimum: 2 Sec

Low: 2.5 Sec

Medium: 5 Sec

RS-232 Interface 6-15

Host Serial Response Time-out (continued)

High: 7.5 Sec

Maximum: 9.9 Sec

RTS Line State
This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High RTS line state.

*Host: Low RTS

Host: High RTS

Beep on
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner issues a beep when a character is detected on the RS-232 serial line. is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important event.

Beep On Character (Enable)

*Do Not Beep On Character
(Disable)

6-16

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.

*Minimum: 0 msec

Low: 25 msec

Medium: 50 msec

High: 75 msec

Maximum: 99 msec

RS-232 Interface 6-17

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
When Nixdorf Mode B is selected, this indicates when the scanner should beep and turn on its LED after a decode.

*Normal Operation (Beep/LED immediately after decode)

Beep/LED After Transmission

Beep/LED After CTS Pulse

Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character and then an error beep sounds on the scanner.

*Send Bar Code with Unknown Characters

Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

6-18

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

ASCII Character Set for RS-232
The values in Table 6-4 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission.

Table 6-4. ASCII Character Set for RS-232
ASCII Value 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character %U $A $B $C $D $E $F $G $H $I $J $K $L $M $N $O $P $Q $R $S $T $U $V $W $X $Y $Z %A %B %C %D %E Space ASCII Character NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BELL BCKSPC HORIZ TAB LF/NW LN VT FF CR/ENTER SO SI DLE DC1/XON DC2 DC3/XOFF DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US Space

RS-232 Interface 6-19

Table 6-4. ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued)
ASCII Value 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1057 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character /A /B /C /D /E /F /G /H /I /J /K /L . /O 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 /Z %F %G %H %I %J %V A B C ASCII Character ! " # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? @ A B C

6-20

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 6-4. ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued)
ASCII Value 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z %K %L %M %N %O %W +A +B +C +D +E +F ASCII Character D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ ` a b c d e f

RS-232 Interface 6-21

Table 6-4. ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued)
ASCII Value 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 7013 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character +G +H +I +J +K +L +M +N +O +P +Q +R +S +T +U +V +W +X +Y +Z %P %Q %R %S ASCII Character g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ Undefined ENTER

6-22

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

USB Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Connecting a USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 USB Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 USB Host Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 USB Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 USB Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 USB CAPS Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 USB Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Emulate Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Simulated Caps Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Convert Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 ASCII Character Set for USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

7-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

USB Interface 7-3

Introduction
This chapter covers the connection and setup of the scanner to a USB host. The scanner attaches directly to a USB host, or a powered USB hub, and is powered by it. No additional power supply is required. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).

* Indicates Default

*North American Standard USB Keyboard

Feature/Option

Connecting a USB Interface

USB Series A Connector

Interface cable

Figure 7-1. USB Connection
The scanner connects with USB capable hosts including: • • • • Desktop PCs and Notebooks Apple™ iMac, G4, iBooks (North America only) IBM SurePOS terminals Sun, IBM, and other network computers that support more than one keyboard.

The following operating systems support the scanner through USB: • • • Windows 98, 2000, ME, XP MacOS 8.5 and above IBM 4690 OS.

The scanner will also interface with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices (HID). For more information on USB technology, hosts, and peripheral devices, visit www.symbol.com/usb.

7-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

To set up the scanner: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 7-1are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same.

1. Attach the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal. 3. Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 7-5. 4. On first installation when using Windows, the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice. The scanner powers up during this installation. 5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-3.

USB Parameter Defaults
Table 7-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. If any option needs to be changed, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 7-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 7-1. USB Host Default Table
Parameter USB Host Parameters USB Device Type USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) USB Keystroke Delay USB CAPS Lock Override USB Ignore Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad USB FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case HID Keyboard Emulation North American No Delay Disable Send Disable Disable Disable Disable No Case Conversion 7-5 7-6 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-11 Default Page Number

USB Interface 7-5

USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
Select the desired USB device type. When changing USB Device Types, the scanner automatically restarts. The scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences.

*HID Keyboard Emulation

IBM Table Top USB

IBM Hand-Held USB

USB OPOS Handheld

7-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. When changing USB country keyboard types the scanner automatically resets. The scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences.

*North American Standard USB Keyboard

German Windows

French Windows

French Canadian Windows 95/98

French Canadian Windows 2000/XP

Spanish Windows

USB Interface 7-7

USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes continued)

Italian Windows

Swedish Windows

UK English Windows

Japanese Windows (ASCII)

Portuguese-Brazilian Windows

7-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

USB Keystroke Delay
This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data.

*No Delay

Medium Delay (20 msec)

Long Delay (40 msec)

USB CAPS Lock Override
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always enabled for the “Japanese, Windows (ASCII)” keyboard type and can not be disabled.

Override Caps Lock Key (Enable)

*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)

USB Interface 7-9

USB Ignore Unknown Characters
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character, then the scanner issues an error beep.

*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

Emulate Keypad
When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example ASCII A would be sent as “ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break.”

*Disable Keypad Emulation

Enable Keypad Emulation

7-10

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution
This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, this allows replacement of any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 13-8 to set the Key Category and Key Value).

Enable FN1 Substitution

*Disable FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequences (see Table 7-2 on page 7-12). When this parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled.

*Disable Function Key Mapping

Enable Function Key Mapping

USB Interface 7-11

Simulated Caps Lock
When enabled, the scanner will invert upper and lower case characters on the scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state.

*Disable Simulated Caps Lock

Enable Simulated Caps Lock

Convert Case
When enabled, the scanner will convert all bar code data to the selected case.

*No Case Conversion

Convert All to Upper Case

Convert All to Lower Case

7-12

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

ASCII Character Set for USB
Table 7-2. ASCII Character Set for USB
ASCII Value 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 keystroke is sent. Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character %U $A $B $C $D $E $F $G $H $I $J $K $L $M $N $O $P $Q $R $S $T $U $V $W $X $Y $Z %A %B %C %D Keystroke CTRL 2 CTRL A CTRL B CTRL C CTRL D CTRL E CTRL F CTRL G CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1 CTRL J CTRL K CTRL L CTRL M/ENTER1 CTRL N CTRL O CTRL P CTRL Q CTRL R CTRL S CTRL T CTRL U CTRL V CTRL W CTRL X CTRL Y CTRL Z CTRL [/ESC1 CTRL \ CTRL ] CTRL 6

1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded

USB Interface 7-13

Table 7-2. ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued)
ASCII Value 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 keystroke is sent. Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character %E Space /A /B /C /D /E /F /G /H /I /J /K /L . /O 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 /Z %F %G %H %I %J Keystroke CTRL Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?

1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded

7-14

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 7-2. ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued)
ASCII Value 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 keystroke is sent. Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character %V A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z %K %L %M %N %O %W Keystroke @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ `

1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded

USB Interface 7-15

Table 7-2. ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued)
ASCII Value 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 keystroke is sent. Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character +A +B +C +D +E +F +G +H +I +J +K +L +M +N +O +P +Q +R +S +T +U +V +W +X +Y +Z %P %Q %R %S Keystroke a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded

7-16

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 7-3. USB ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 Keystroke ALT 2 ALT A ALT B ALT C ALT D ALT E ALT F ALT G ALT H ALT I ALT J ALT K ALT L ALT M ALT N ALT O ALT P ALT Q ALT R ALT S ALT T ALT U ALT V ALT W ALT X ALT Y ALT Z

USB Interface 7-17

Table 7-4. USB GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key 3000 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 Keystroke Right Control Key GUI 0 GUI 1 GUI 2 GUI 3 GUI 4 GUI 5 GUI 6 GUI 7 GUI 8 GUI 9 GUI A GUI B GUI C GUI D GUI E GUI F GUI G GUI H GUI I GUI J GUI K GUI L GUI M GUI N GUI O GUI P GUI Q GUI R GUI S GUI T GUI U GUI V GUI W

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

7-18

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 7-4. USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key 3088 3089 3090 Keystroke GUI X GUI Y GUI Z

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

Table 7-5. USB F Key Character Set
F Keys 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 Keystroke F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24

USB Interface 7-19

Table 7-6. USB Numeric Keypad Character Set
Numeric Keypad 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 Keystroke * + undefined . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Enter Num Lock

7-20

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 7-7. USB Extended Keypad Character Set
Extended Keypad 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 Keystroke Break Delete PgUp End Pg Dn Pause Scroll Lock Backspace Tab Print Screen Insert Home Enter Escape Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow

IBM Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 IBM Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Port Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Convert Unknown to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Optional IBM Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Ignore Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Ignore Bar Code Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

8-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

IBM Interface

8-3

Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).

* Indicates Default

*Disable Convert to Code
39

Feature/Option

Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host
This connection is made directly from the scanner to the host interface.

Interface cable

Host Port Connector

Figure 8-1. IBM Direct Connection
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 8-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same.

1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9). 3. Select the port address by scanning the appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 8-5. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The only required configuration is the port number. Other scanner parameters are typically controlled by the IBM system.

8-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

IBM Parameter Defaults
Table 8-1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 8-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 8-1. IBM Host Default Table
Parameter IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters Port Address Convert Unknown to Code 39 Ignore Beep Ignore Bar Code Configuration None Selected Disable Disable Disable 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-7 Default Page Number

IBM Interface

8-5

IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address
This parameter sets the IBM 468X/469X port used. Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS-485 interface on the scanner.

* None Selected

Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)1

Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)

Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)

1

User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

8-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Convert Unknown to Code 39
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39.

Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39

*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39

IBM Interface

8-7

Optional IBM Parameters
If you configure the scanner and find the settings were not saved, or changed, when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override IBM interface defaults. Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the scanner.

Ignore Beep
The host can send a beep request to the scanner. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the attached scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed.

*Disable

Enable

Ignore Bar Code Configuration
The host has the ability to enable/disable code types. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the attached scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed.

*Disable

Enable

8-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Wand Emulation Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Connecting Using Wand Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Wand Emulation Host Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Wand Emulation Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Wand Emulation Interface 9-3

Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with a wand emulation host when Wand Emulation communication is needed. The scanner connects to an external wand decoder or to a decoder integrated in a mobile computer or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal. In this mode the scanner emulates the signal of a wand to make it "readable" by a wand decoder. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).

* Indicates Default

*Transmit Unknown Characters

Feature/Option

Connecting Using Wand Emulation
To perform Wand Emulation, connect the scanner to a portable data terminal, or a controller which collects the wand data and interprets it for the host.
Mobile Computer

Wand Port

Interface Cable

Figure 9-1. Wand Emulation Connection
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 9-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same.

1. the modular connector of the Wand Emulation interface cable to cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Connect the other end of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the wand port on the mobile computer or controller. 3. Select the Wand Emulation host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Wand Emulation Host Types on page 9-5. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. Connect the scanner to 5 volt decoders only. Connecting the scanner to a 12 volt decoder can damage the scanner and invalidate the warranty.

WARNING

9-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults
Table 9-1 lists the defaults for Wand Emulation host types. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in Wand Emulation Host Parameters beginning on page page 9-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 9-1. Wand Emulation Default Table
Parameter Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Leading Margin Polarity Ignore Unknown Characters Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1 80 msec Bar High/Margin Low Send Disable Disable 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-7 9-8 9-9 Default Page Number

1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

Wand Emulation Interface 9-5

Wand Emulation Host Parameters
Wand Emulation Host Types
Select a Wand Emulation host by scanning one of the bar codes below.

Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1

Symbol PDT Terminal (MSI)

Symbol PTC Terminal (Telxon)
1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

9-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Leading Margin (Quiet Zone)
Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration. A leading margin is the time that precedes the first bar of the scan, (in milliseconds). The minimum allowed value is 80 msec and the maximum is 250 msec. This parameter accommodates older wand decoders which cannot handle short leading margins. 250 msec is the maximum value that this parameter can attain, however, 200 msec is sufficient.

*80 msec

140 msec

200 msec

Wand Emulation Interface 9-7

Polarity
Scan a bar code below to select the polarity required by the decoder. Polarity determines how the scanner's Wand Emulation interface creates the Digitized Barcode Pattern (DBP). DBP is a digital signal that represents the scanned bar code. Different decoders expect the DBP to be in a certain format. The DBP either has the "highs" represent bars and the "lows" represent spaces (margins), or the "highs" represent spaces (margins) and the "lows" represent bars.

*Bar High/Margin Low

Bar Low/Margin High

Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host, and the scanner emits an error beep.

*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters

Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters

9-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39
By default, the Wand Emulation interface sends data to the attached host in the same symbology that was decoded. This can be a problem for customers with older systems that do not recognize newer symbologies (for example, RSS). Enabling this parameter ignores the original symbology decoded, and outputs the data as if it were a Code 39 bar code. Any lowercase characters in the original data stream are transmitted as uppercase characters. This also allows ADF rules. If Ignore Unknown Characters is enabled, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If Ignore Unknown Characters is disabled, if any characters that do not have a corresponding character are encountered, the scanner emits an error beep and no data is transmitted. ADF Note: By default, the Wand Emulation interface does not allow scanned data to be processed by ADF rules. Enabling this parameter has the side effect of allowing the scanned data to be processed by the ADF rules (see Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting).

Enable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host

*Disable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host

Wand Emulation Interface 9-9

Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII
By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If this parameter is enabled, the data sent to the wand interface is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII. This setting requires that the host be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data. This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled.

*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion

Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion

9-10

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Scanner Emulation Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Connecting Using Scanner Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Scanner Emulation Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Scanner Emulation Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Beep Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Parameter Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Convert Newer Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Module Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Leading Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Check For Decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

10-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Scanner Emulation Interface 10-3

Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with a Scanner Emulation host. Use this mode when Scanner Emulation communication is needed. In this mode, the scanner connects to an external decoder or to a decoder integrated in a mobile computer or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).

* Indicates Default

*Parameter Process and
Pass-Through

Feature/Option

Connecting Using Scanner Emulation
To perform Scanner Emulation, connect the scanner to a mobile computer, or a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host.

Interface Cable Host Port Connector

Figure 10-1. Scanner Emulation Connection
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 10-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same.

1. Attach the modular connector of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Connect the other end of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the scanner port on the mobile computer or controller. 3. Scan the Scanner Emulation host bar code from Scanner Emulation Host on page 10-5 to enable the Scanner Emulation host interface. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. Connect the scanner to 5 volt decoders only. Connecting the scanner to a 12 volt decoder can damage the scanner and invalidate the warranty.
WARNING

10-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults
Table 10-1 lists the defaults for the Scanner Emulation host. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Scanner Emulation Host Parameters section beginning on page page 10-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 10-1. Scanner Emulation Default Table
Parameter Beep Style Parameter Pass-Through Convert Newer Code Types Module Width Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Transmission Timeout Ignore Unknown Characters Leading Margin Check for Decode LED Default Beep on Successful Transmit Parameter Process and Pass Through Convert Newer Code Types 20 µs Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 3 Sec Ignore Unknown Characters 2 ms Check for Decode LED Page Number 10-5 10-6 10-6 10-7 10-7 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-9 10-10

1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

Scanner Emulation Interface 10-5

Scanner Emulation Host
Scan the bar code below to enable the Scanner Emulation host.

Undecoded Scanner Emulation Host

Scanner Emulation Host Parameters
Beep Style
The Scanner Emulation host supports three beep styles. • • • Beep On Successful Transmit: The scanner beeps when the attached decoder issues the decode signal to the scanner, so the scanner and the attached decoder beep at the same time. Beep At Decode Time: The scanner beeps upon decode. This results in a double beep sequence from most decoders, since the scanner beeps, and the decoder beeps (at a different frequency) when it successfully decodes the output. Do Not Beep: Only the attached decoder issues the decode beep.

*Beep On Successful Transmit

Beep At Decode Time

Do Not Beep

10-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Parameter Pass-Through
The Scanner Emulation host can process parameter bar code messages and send them to the attached decoder. In this way, customers using Symbol compliant decoders can control the behavior of the entire system by scanning the necessary parameters only once. For example, to enable D 2 of 5, scan the D 2 of 5 Enable parameter bar code. The scanner and the attached decoder both process the parameter.

*Parameter Process and Pass-Through

Parameter Process Only

Convert Newer Code Types
The scanner supports a variety of code types that are not decodable by attached decoder systems. To allow compatibility in these environments, the scanner converts these code types to more commonly decodable symbologies, as per the following chart. Symbologies not listed on this chart are transmitted normally.
Scan this code type: Code 11 Chinese 2 of 5 RSS (14, Limited, and Expanded) Coupon Code Transmitted as: Code 39 Code 39 Code 128 Code 128

When decoding these code types with this parameter disabled, the scanner issues Convert Error beeps and transmits no data.

*Convert Newer Code Types

Reject Newer Code Types

Scanner Emulation Interface 10-7

Module Width
The standard module width is 20 µs. For an extremely slow decoder system, select 50 µs Module Width.

*20 µs Module Width

50 µs Module Width

Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39
Scan the bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of all bar code data to Code 39.

*Do Not Convert Bar Codes To Code 39

Convert All To Code 39

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If this parameter is enabled, the data sent to the Scanner Emulation host is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII. The host must be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data. This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled.

*Disable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII

Enable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII

10-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Transmission Timeout
The Scanner Emulation host transmits bar code data to the attached decoder and waits for the decoder to assert the Decode signal, indicating successful transmission. If, after a specified amount of time, the Decode signal is not asserted (indicating that the attached decoder has not successfully received the bar code data), the scanner issues transmit error beeps. Scan a bar code below to select the desired transmission timeout.

*3 Second Transmission Timeout

4 Second Transmission Timeout

5 Second Transmission Timeout

10 Second Transmission Timeout

30 Second Transmission Timeout

Scanner Emulation Interface 10-9

Ignore Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the decoder does not recognize. When Ignore Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Convert Error on Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the decoder, and a convert error beep sounds.

*Ignore Unknown Characters

Convert Error On Unknown Characters

Leading Margin
Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration.

1 ms Leading Margin

*2 ms Leading Margin

3 ms Leading Margin

10-10

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Leading Margin (continued)

5 ms Leading Margin

10 ms Leading Margin

Check For Decode LED
The attached decoder normally asserts the Decode line to signal to the Scanner Emulation host that it successfully decoded the transmitted bar code. Some decoders, however, do not assert the Decode signal. In this case, the scanner emits transmit error beeps to indicate that the bar code was not successfully transmitted. Scan the Ignore Decode LED bar code to disable the Transmit Error beeps.

*Check For Decode LED

Ignore Decode LED

123Scan
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Communication with 123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 123Scan Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

123Scan 11-3

Introduction
123Scan is a Windows®-based utility that programs the scanner with all parameters including ADF rules. An ADF rule modifies bar code data before it is sent to the host to ensure compatibility between bar coded data and the host application. Scanners can be programmed via PC download or by scanning a sheet of bar codes generated by the utility. Scanner programming is saved in a file for electronic distribution. The 123Scan program includes a help file.

Communication with 123Scan
To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows operating system, use an RS-232 cable to connect the scanner to the host computer (seeConnecting an RS-232 Interface on page 6-3). 123Scan requirements: • • • Host computer with Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, or Windows XP Scanner RS-232 cable.

123Scan Parameter
To communicate with the 123Scan program, load 123Scan, included in the documentation CD-ROM, onto the host computer, and scan the bar code below. Refer to 123Scan instructions for programming the scanner. Scan the bar code below to enable the 123Scan interface on the scanner.

123Scan Configuration

11-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Symbologies
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Symbology Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Enable/Disable UPC-A/UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Enable/Disable UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Enable/Disable EAN-13/EAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Enable/Disable Bookland EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Transmit UPC-E Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 UPC-A Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 UPC-E Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 UPC-E1 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 Convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 Bookland ISBN Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 UCC Coupon Extended Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 Enable/Disable Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 Enable/Disable ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20

12-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Enable/Disable Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Convert Code 39 to Code 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-22 Code 32 Prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-22 Set Lengths for Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23 Code 39 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-24 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-24 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25 Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Enable/Disable Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Set Lengths for Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Set Lengths for Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Code 11 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-35 Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36 Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-39 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-39 Codabar (NW - 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 Enable/Disable Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 Set Lengths for Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 CLSI Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-41 NOTIS Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-42 MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 Enable/Disable MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 Set Lengths for MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 MSI Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-44 Transmit MSI Check Digit(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45 MSI Check Digit Algorithm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45 RSS (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-46 Convert RSS to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-47 Symbology - Specific Security Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48 Redundancy Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48 Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-50 Intercharacter Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-51 Report Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Report MIMIC Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Report Synapse Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52

Symbologies 12-3

Introduction
This chapter describes symbology features and provides the programming bar codes for selecting these features. Before programming, follow the instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started. The scanner is shipped with the settings shown in the Symbology Parameter Defaults on page 12-4 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner is powered down. If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, scan the appropriate default bar code on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).

* Indicates Default

*Enable UPC-A

Feature/Option

Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data without the UPC-A check digit, simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit on page 12-13. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5, require scanning several bar codes. See the individual parameter, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5, for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

12-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Symbology Parameter Defaults
Table 12-1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Symbologies Parameters section beginning on 12-7. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 12-1. Symbology Parameter Defaults
Parameter UPC/EAN UPC-A UPC-E UPC-E1 EAN-8/JAN 8 EAN-13/JAN 13 Bookland EAN Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit UPC-A Preamble UPC-E Preamble UPC-E1 Preamble Convert UPC-E to A Convert UPC-E1 to A EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Bookland ISBN Format UCC Coupon Extended Code Code 128 Code 128 UCC/EAN-128 ISBT 128 (non-concatenated) Code 39 Code 39 Trioptic Code 39 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Code 32 Prefix Enable Disable Disable Disable 12-21 12-21 12-22 12-22 Enable Enable Enable 12-19 12-19 12-20 Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable Ignore 7 Enable Enable Enable System Character System Character System Character Disable Disable Disable ISBN-10 Disable 12-7 12-7 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-9 12-10 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-16 12-16 12-17 12-17 12-18 12-18 Default Page Number

Symbologies 12-5

Table 12-1. Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Set Length(s) for Code 39 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Buffer Code 39 Code 93 Code 93 Set Length(s) for Code 93 Code 11 Code 11 Set Lengths for Code 11 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) Discrete 2 of 5 Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Codabar (NW - 7) Codabar Set Lengths for Codabar CLSI Editing NOTIS Editing MSI MSI Set Length(s) for MSI MSI Check Digits Transmit MSI Check Digit MSI Check Digit Algorithm Disable 2 to 55 One Disable Mod 10/Mod 10 12-43 12-43 12-44 12-45 12-45 Disable 5 to 55 Disable Disable 12-40 12-40 12-41 12-42 Disable 12-39 Disable 12 12-37 12-37 Enable 14 Disable Disable Disable 12-34 12-34 12-35 12-36 12-36 Disable 4 to 55 Disable Disable 12-31 12-31 12-33 12-33 Disable 4 to 55 12-29 12-29 Default 2 to 55 Disable Disable Disable Disable Page Number 12-23 12-24 12-24 12-25 12-25

12-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table 12-1. Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded Convert RSS to UPC/EAN Symbology - Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level Security Levels Bi-directional Redundancy Intercharacter Gap Report Version Report MIMIC Version Report Synapse Cable 1 0 Disable Normal Intercharacter Gap 12-48 12-50 12-51 12-51 12-52 12-52 12-52 Disable Disable Disable Disable 12-46 12-46 12-46 12-47 Default Page Number

Symbologies 12-7

UPC/EAN
Enable/Disable UPC-A/UPC-E
To enable or disable UPC-A or UPC-E, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable UPC-A

Disable UPC-A

*Enable UPC-E

Disable UPC-E

12-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Enable/Disable UPC-E1
UPC-E1 is disabled by default. To enable or disable UPC-E1, scan the appropriate bar code below. UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.

Enable UPC-E1

*Disable UPC-E1 Enable/Disable EAN-13/EAN-8
To enable or disable EAN-13 or EAN-8, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable EAN-13

Disable EAN-13

*Enable EAN-8

Disable EAN-8

Symbologies 12-9

Enable/Disable Bookland EAN
To enable or disable Bookland EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Bookland EAN

*Disable Bookland EAN
If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 12-18. Also select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC/ EAN/JAN Supplementals.

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
Supplementals are additionally appended characters (2 or 5) according to specific code format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN 8+2). The following options are available: • • • If you select Ignore UPC/EAN with Supplementals, and the scanner is presented with a UPC/EAN plus supplemental symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN and ignores the supplemental characters. If you select Decode UPC/EAN with Supplementals, the scanner only decodes UPC/EAN symbols with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals. If you select Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12-13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental. If you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options, the scanner immediately transmits EAN-13 bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12-13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental. The scanner transmits UPC/EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately. • Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode • Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes, see Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 12-9 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 12-18.

•

• Enable 977 Supplemental Mode • Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode • Enable 491 Supplemental Mode

12-10

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

• •

• Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously. • Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with a 3-digit user-defined prefix. Set this 3-digit prefix using Supplemental User-Programmable 1. • Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with either of two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the 3-digit prefixes using Supplemental User-Programmable 1 and Supplemental UserProgrammable 2. • Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or the user-defined prefix set using Supplemental User-Programmable 1. • Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using Supplemental User-Programmable 1 and Supplemental User-Programmable 2. Select Supplemental User-Programmable 1 to set a 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1. Select Supplemental User-Programmable 2 to set a second 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1. To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters.

*Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals

Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode

Symbologies 12-11

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)

Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode

Enable 977 Supplemental Mode

Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode

Enable 491 Supplemental Mode

Enable Smart Supplemental Mode

Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1

12-12

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)

Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2

Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1

Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2

Supplemental User-Programmable 1

Supplemental User-Programmable 2

Symbologies 12-13

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
With Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals or one of the supplemental modes selected, this option adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission. The range is from 2 to 22 times. Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals, and the autodiscriminate option is selected. The default is set at 7. Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. Single digit numbers must have a leading zero. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.

*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.

*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

12-14

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.

*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

UPC-A Preamble
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System Character. Three options are given for transmitting UPC-A preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and no preamble transmitted. Scan a bar code below to match the host system.

No Preamble ()

*System Character ( )

System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> )

Symbologies 12-15

UPC-E Preamble
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System Character. Three options are given for transmitting UPC-E preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and no preamble transmitted. Scan a bar code below to match the host system.

No Preamble ()

*System Character ( )

System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> )

12-16

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

UPC-E1 Preamble
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System Character. Three options are given for transmitting UPC-E1 preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and no preamble transmitted. Scan a bar code below to match the host system.

No Preamble ()

*System Character ( )

System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> )

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). When disabled, UPC-E decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E data, without conversion.

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)

*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
(Disable)

Symbologies 12-17

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
Enable this to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). When disabled, UPC-E1 decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)

*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
(Disable)

EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend
When enabled, this parameter adds five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. When disabled, EAN-8 symbols are transmitted as is.

Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

12-18

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Bookland ISBN Format
If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 12-9, select one of the following formats for Bookland data: • • Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered Bookland in this mode. Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in 13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.

*Bookland ISBN-10

Bookland ISBN-13

For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 12-9, then select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 12-9.

UCC Coupon Extended Code
When enabled, this parameter decodes UPCA bar codes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 bar codes starting with digit ‘99’, and UPCA/ EAN-128 Coupon Codes. UPCA, EAN-13 and EAN-128 must be enabled to scan all types of Coupon Codes.

Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code

*Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code
Use the Decode UPC/EAN Supplemental Redundancy parameter to control autodiscrimination of the EAN128 (right half) of a coupon code.

Symbologies 12-19

Code 128
Enable/Disable Code 128
To enable or disable Code 128, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable Code 128

Disable Code 128

Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128
To enable or disable UCC/EAN-128, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable UCC/EAN-128

Disable UCC/EAN-128

12-20

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Enable/Disable ISBT 128
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable ISBT 128. If necessary, the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data.

*Enable ISBT 128

Disable ISBT 128

Symbologies 12-21

Code 39
Enable/Disable Code 39
To enable or disable Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable Code 39

Disable Code 39

Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Trioptic Code 39

*Disable Trioptic Code 39
Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously.

12-22

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Convert Code 39 to Code 32
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32. Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function.

.

Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32

*Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Code 32 Prefix
Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 bar codes. Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Enable Code 32 Prefix

*Disable Code 32 Prefix

Symbologies 12-23

Set Lengths for Code 39 he length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options. When setting lengths for different bar code types by scanning single digit numbers, single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero.

•

•

•

•

One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 39 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability.

Code 39 - One Discrete Length

Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 39 - Length Within Range

Code 39 - Any Length

12-24

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Code 39 Check Digit Verification
When this feature is enabled, the scanner checks the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded. Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.

Enable Code 39 Check Digit

*Disable Code 39 Check Digit Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)

*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
(Disable)

Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Symbologies 12-25

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Code 39 Full ASCII

*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII
Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously. Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent and is described in the ASCII Character Set table for the appropriate interface. See ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge on page 5-13, ASCII Character Set for RS-232 on page 6-18 and ASCII Character Set for USB on page 7-12 for the appropriate interface.

Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store)
This feature allows the scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols. Selecting the Scan and Store option (Buffer Code 39) temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading space as a first character for later transmission. The leading space is not buffered. Decode of a valid Code 39 symbol with no leading space causes transmission in sequence of all buffered data in a first-in first-out format, plus transmission of the “triggering” symbol. See the following pages for further details. When the Do Not Buffer Code 39 option is selected, all decoded Code 39 symbols are transmitted immediately without being stored in the buffer.

12-26

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

This feature affects Code 39 only. If selecting Buffer Code 39, we recommend configuring the scanner to decode Code 39 symbology only.

Buffer Code 39 (Enable)

*Do Not Buffer Code 39
(Disable)

While there is data in the transmission buffer, selecting Do Not Buffer Code 39 is not allowed. The buffer holds 200 bytes of information. To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer, first force the buffer transmission (see Transmit Buffer on page 12-27) or clear the buffer.

Buffer Data
To buffer data, Code 39 buffering must be enabled and a Code 39 symbol must be read with a space immediately following the start pattern. • • • Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer, the scanner issues a low/high beep to indicate successful decode and buffering. (For overflow conditions, see Overfilling Transmission Buffer.) The scanner adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer. No transmission occurs.

Symbologies 12-27

Clear Transmission Buffer
To clear the transmission buffer, scan the Clear Buffer bar code below, which contains only a start character, a dash (minus), and a stop character. • • • The scanner issues a short high/low/high beep. The scanner erases the transmission buffer. No transmission occurs.

Clear Buffer

Because the Clear Buffer contains only the dash (minus) character, set the Code 39 length to include length 1 before scanning this bar code.

Transmit Buffer
There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer. 1. Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below which contains only a start character, a plus (+), and a stop character. • The scanner transmits and clears the buffer. • The scanner issues a low/high beep.

Transmit Buffer

2. Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space. • The scanner appends new decode data to buffered data. • The scanner transmits and clears the buffer. • The scanner signals that the buffer was transmitted with a low/high beep. • Scanner transmits and clears the buffer. Because the Transmit Buffer contains only a plus (+) character, set the Code 39 length to include length 1 before scanning this bar code.

12-28

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Overfilling Transmission Buffer
The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters. If the symbol just read results in an overflow of the transmission buffer: • • The scanner indicates that the symbol was rejected by issuing three long, high beeps. No transmission occurs. The data in the buffer is not affected.

Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer
If the symbol just read was the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty: • • • A short low/high/low beep signals that the buffer is empty. No transmission occurs. The buffer remains empty.

Symbologies 12-29

Code 93
Enable/Disable Code 93
To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Code 93

*Disable Code 93 Set Lengths for Code 93
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 93 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.

•

•

•

12-30

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)

Code 93 - One Discrete Length

Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 93 - Length Within Range

Code 93 - Any Length

Symbologies 12-31

Code 11
Code 11
To enable or disable Code 11, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Code 11

*Disable Code 11 Set Lengths for Code 11
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 11 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability.

•

•

•

12-32

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)

Code 11 - One Discrete Length

Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 11 - Length Within Range

Code 11 - Any Length

Symbologies 12-33

Code 11 Check Digit Verification
This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm. This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code. The options are to check for one check digit, check for two check digits, or disable the feature. To enable this feature, scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in your Code 11 symbols.

*Disable

One Check Digit

Two Check Digits

Transmit Code 11 Check Digits
This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)

*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)
(Disable)

Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.

12-34

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below, and select an Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following pages.

*Enable Interleaved 2 of 5

Disable Interleaved 2 of 5

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode an I 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability. Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications.

•

•

•

Note

Symbologies 12-35

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)

I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

I 2 of 5 - Any Length

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
When this feature is enabled, the scanner checks the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm.

*Disable

USS Check Digit

OPCC Check Digit

12-36

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)

*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
(Disable)

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
Enable this parameter to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13 check digit.

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)

*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
(Disable)

Symbologies 12-37

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5
To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Discrete 2 of 5

*Disable Discrete 2 of 5 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 he length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability. Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5 applications.

•

•

•

Note

12-38

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)

D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

D 2 of 5 - Any Length

Symbologies 12-39

Chinese 2 of 5
Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5
To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Chinese 2 of 5

*Disable Chinese 2 of 5

12-40

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Codabar (NW - 7)
Enable/Disable Codabar
To enable or disable Codabar, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Codabar

*Disable Codabar Set Lengths for Codabar
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Codabar - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability.

•

•

•

Symbologies 12-41

Set Lengths for Codabar (continued).

Codabar - One Discrete Length

Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths

Codabar - Length Within Range

Codabar - Any Length

CLSI Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if your host system requires this data format. Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.

Enable CLSI Editing

*Disable CLSI Editing

12-42

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

NOTIS Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if your host system requires this data format.

Enable NOTIS Editing

*Disable NOTIS Editing

Symbologies 12-43

MSI
Enable/Disable MSI
To enable or disable MSI, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable MSI

*Disable MSI Set Lengths for MSI
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan MSI - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability. Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications.

•

•

•

Note

12-44

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Set Lengths for MSI (continued)

MSI - One Discrete Length

MSI - Two Discrete Lengths

MSI - Length Within Range

MSI - Any Length

MSI Check Digits
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit. See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 12-45 for the selection of second digit algorithms.

*One MSI Check Digit

Two MSI Check Digits

Symbologies 12-45

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)

*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)
(Disable)

MSI Check Digit Algorithm
Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit. Select the bar code below corresponding to the algorithm used to encode your check digit.

MOD 10/MOD 11

*MOD 10/MOD 10

12-46

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)
The variants of RSS are RSS 14, RSS Expanded and RSS Limited. RSS 14 and RSS Expanded include stacked versions. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable each variant of RSS.

Enable RSS 14

*Disable RSS 14

Enable RSS Limited

*Disable RSS Limited

Enable RSS Expanded

*Disable RSS Expanded

Symbologies 12-47

Convert RSS to UPC/EAN
This parameter only applies to RSS-14 and RSS Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol. Enable this to strip the leading '010' from RSS-14 and RSS Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the bar code as EAN-13. For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros, this parameter strips the leading '0100' and reports the bar code as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.

Enable Convert RSS to UPC/EAN

*Disable Convert RSS to UPC/EAN

12-48

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Symbology - Specific Security Levels
Redundancy Level
The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner’s aggressiveness decreases. Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality.

Redundancy Level 1
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Code Type Codabar MSI D 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Code Length 8 characters or less 4 characters or less 8 characters or less 8 characters or less

Redundancy Level 2
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Code Type All All Code Length

Redundancy Level 3
Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:
Code Type MSI D 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Codabar Code Length 4 characters or less 8 characters or less 8 characters or less 8 characters or less

Redundancy Level 4
The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded:
Code Type All All Code Length

Symbologies 12-49

Redundancy Level (continued)

*Redundancy Level 1

Redundancy Level 2

Redundancy Level 3

Redundancy Level 4

12-50

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Security Level
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family, UPC/EAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security necessary for any given application. • • • • Security Level 0: This default setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most “in-spec” bar codes. Security Level 1: Select this option if misdecodes occur. This security level should eliminate most misdecodes. Security Level 2: Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes. Security Level 3: If Security Level 2 was selected and misdecodes still occur, select this security level. Be advised, selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out of spec bar codes. Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is necessary, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.

*Security Level 0

Security Level 1

Security Level 2

Security Level 3

Symbologies 12-51

Bi-directional Redundancy
Enable Bi-directional Redundancy to add security to linear code type security levels. When enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions (forward and reverse) before reporting a good decode.

Enable Bi-directional Redundancy

*Disable Bi-directional Redundancy

Intercharacter Gap
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is customarily quite small. Due to various bar code printing technologies, this gap may grow larger than the maximum size allowed, causing the scanner to be unable to decode the symbol. If this problem is encountered, scan Large Intercharacter Gaps to tolerate out-of-specification bar codes.

*Normal Intercharacter Gap

Large Intercharacter Gap

12-52

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Report Version
Scan the bar code below to report the software revision installed in the scanner’s primary microprocessor.

Report Software Version

Report MIMIC Version
Scan the bar code below to report the MIMIC software revision installed in the scanner’s secondary microprocessor. Symbol scanners that do not use MIMIC architecture report nothing.

Report MIMIC Software Version

Report Synapse Cable
Scan the bar code below to report the software revision of the attached Synapse cable. If the scanner does not detect an attached Synapse cable, it reports Synapse not attached.

Report Synapse Cable

Miscellaneous Scanner Options
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Miscellaneous Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Transmit Code ID Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Prefix/Suffix Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Scan Data Transmission Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 FN1 Substitution Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Transmit “No Read” Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Synapse Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

13-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Miscellaneous Scanner Options 13-3

Introduction
This chapter includes commonly used bar codes to customize how data is transmitted to the host device. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programming Guide p/n 72-69680-xx for further customization options. The scanner ships with the settings shown in the Miscellaneous Scanner Options Default Table on page 13-4 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous scanner defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner is powered down. If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, scan a default bar code in Default Parameters on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).

* Indicates Default

*Disable No Read
(00h)

Feature/Option Hex Value

Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scan one bar code to set a specific parameter value. Other parameters, such as Prefix Value, require scanning several bar codes. See each parameter for descriptions of this procedure.

Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

13-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Miscellaneous Parameter Defaults
Table 13-1 lists the defaults for miscellaneous scanner options parameters. If you wish to change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters section beginning on page 13-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 13-1. Miscellaneous Scanner Options Default Table
Parameter Transmit Code ID Character Prefix Value Suffix Value Scan Data Transmission Format FN1 Substitution Values Transmit “No Read” Message Synapse Interface Transmit Code ID Character Default None 7013 7013 Data as is Set Disable Standard None Page Number 13-5 13-5 13-6 13-6 13-8 13-8 13-9 13-5

Miscellaneous Scanner Options 13-5

Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters
Transmit Code ID Character
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This may be useful when the scanner is decoding more than one code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol. Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID Characters, see Symbol Code Identifiers on page B-3 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B-4.

Symbol Code ID Character

AIM Code ID Character

*None Prefix/Suffix Values
A prefix and/or one or two suffixes can be appended to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix or suffix, scan a four-digit number (i.e., four bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes) that corresponds to that value. See Table E-1 on page E1 for the four-digit codes. When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the 3-digit decimal value. See Table E-1 on page E-1 for the four-digit codes. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 13-6.

13-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Prefix/Suffix Values (continued)

Scan Prefix

Scan Suffix

Scan Data Transmission Format
To change the scan data format, scan Scan Options and one of the following four bar codes corresponding to the desired format: • • • • Data As Is .

Scan Enter on page 13-7 to complete the change. To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 13-5. Scan Data Format Cancel on page 13-7 to cancel the change. If a carriage return/enter is required after each scanned bar code, scan the following bar codes in order: 1. Scan Options 2. 3. Enter (on page 13-7).

Miscellaneous Scanner Options 13-7

Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)

Scan Options

*Data As Is

Enter

Data Format Cancel

13-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

FN1 Substitution Values
The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support an FN1 substitution feature. When enabled any FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 bar code is substituted with a value. This value defaults to 7013 (Enter Key). To select an FN1 substitution value via bar code menus: 1. Scan the bar code below.

*Set FN1 Substitution Value
2. Look up the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table on page E-1 for the currently installed host interface. 3. Enter the 4-digit substitution value by scanning each digit in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel. To enable FN1 substitution for keyboard wedge, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page page 5-11. To enable FN1 Substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page page 7-10.

Transmit “No Read” Message
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message. When enabled, the characters NR are transmitted when a bar code is not decoded. When disabled, if a symbol does not decode, nothing is sent to the host.

Enable No Read

*Disable No Read

Miscellaneous Scanner Options 13-9

Synapse Interface
The auto-detection of a Synapse cable varies in duration depending on the type of Synapse connection. If a scanner is connected to another scanner using a Synapse cable, use the Auxiliary Synapse Port connection. In all other cases, where the cable is used, the default setting is recommended. To disconnect and reconnect the scanner from a Synapse cable that is connected to a live host via a Synapse, use the "Plug and Play" setting. Do not change this setting from the default if an on-board wedge host is enabled.

*Standard Synapse Connection

Auxiliary Synapse Port Connection

“Plug and Play” Synapse Connection

13-10

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Advanced Data Formatting
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Using ADF Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 ADF Bar Code Menu Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Alternate Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Default Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Special Considerations for Multipoint Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Special Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Pause Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Begin New Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Save Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Quit Entering Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Disable Rule Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Code Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 Message Containing A Specific Data String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 Send Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 Setup Field(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 Modify Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28 Pad Data with Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29

14-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Pad Data with Zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-37 Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38 Send Right Control Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-70 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-70 Turn On/Off Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-76 Alphanumeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-77

Advanced Data Formatting 14-3

Introduction
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to your host device. Scan data can be edited to suit your particular requirements. ADF can be implemented by scanning a related series of bar codes, which begin on page 14-7, or by installing the 123Scan utility (see Chapter 11, 123Scan) which allows the scanner to be set up and programmed with Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rules. If you are using the Wand interface with your scanner, you will not be able to use ADF rules to format your data.
Note

Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions
In ADF, data is customized through rules. These rules perform detailed actions when the data meets certain criteria. One rule may consist of single or multiple criteria applied to single or multiple actions. For instance, a data formatting rule could be the following: Criteria: Actions: When scan data is Code 39, length 12, and data at the start position is the string “129”, pad all sends with zeros to length 8, send all data up to X, send a space.

If a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 is scanned, the following is transmitted: 00001299. If a Code 39 bar code of 1299X15598 is scanned, this rule is ignored because the length criteria has not been met. The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs.

Using ADF Bar Codes
When you program a rule, make sure the rule is logically correct. Plan ahead before you start scanning. To program each data formatting rule: Start the Rule. Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 14-7. Criteria. Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria. Criteria can include code type (e.g., Code 128), code length, or data that contains a specific character string (e.g., the digits “129”). These options are described in Criteria on page 14-10. • Actions. Scan all actions related to, or affecting, these criteria. The actions of a rule specify how to format the data for transmission. These options are described in ADF Bar Code Menu Example on page 14-4. • Save the Rule. Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 14-7. This places the rule in the “top” position in the rule buffer. • If you make errors during this process, some special-purpose bar codes may be useful: Erase Criteria And Start Again bar code on page 14-8, Erase Actions And Start Again bar code on page 14-8, Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 14-8, etc. Criteria, actions, and entire rules may be erased by scanning the appropriate bar code (see bar codes beginning on page 14-10). Use the Beeper Definitions on page 2-4 as a guide for the programming steps. For more information on scanning, see Chapter 2, Scanning. • •

14-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

ADF Bar Code Menu Example
This section provides an example of how ADF rules are entered and used for scan data. An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID, part number, and destination code into their own Code 128 bar codes. The distribution center also has products that carry UPC bar codes, placed there by the manufacturer. The Code 128 bar codes have the following format: MMMMMPPPPPDD Where: M = Manufacturer ID P = Part Number D = Destination Code The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID , part number , and destination code . At this center the UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code. The following rules need to be entered: When scanning data of code type Code 128, send the next 5 characters, send the manufacturer ID key , send the next 5 characters, send the part number key , send the next 2 characters, send the destination code key . When scanning data of code type UPC/EAN, send all data, send the manufacturer ID key . To enter these rules, follow the steps below:

Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bar Code Begin New Rule Code 128 Send next 5 characters Send Send next 5 characters Send Send next 2 characters Send Save Rule On Page 14-7 14-10 14-20 14-39 14-20 14-40 14-20 14-38 14-7 Beep Indication High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High High Low High Low

Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Bar Code Begin New Rule UPC/EAN Send all remaining data Send Save Rule On Page 14-7 14-12 14-20 14-39 14-7 Beep Indication High High High High High High High High High Low High Low

If you made any mistakes while entering this rule, scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page 14-8. If you already saved the rule, scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 14-8.

Advanced Data Formatting 14-5

Alternate Rule Sets
ADF rules may be grouped into one of four alternate sets which can be turned on and off when needed. This is useful when you want to format the same message in different ways. For example, a Code 128 bar code contains the following information: Class (2 digits), Stock Number (8) digits, Price (5 digits) This bar code might look like this: 245671243701500 where: Class = 24 Stock Number = 56712437 Price = 01500 Ordinarily you would send this data as follows: 24 (class key) 56712437 (stock key) 01500 (enter key) But, when there is a sale, you may want to send only the following: 24 (class key) 56712437 (stock key) and the cashier will key the price manually. To implement this, you would first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation. This rule may look like this: When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, send the data that remains, send the Enter key. The “sale” rule may look like this: When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key. To switch between the two sets of rules, a “switching rule” must be programmed. This rule specifies what type of bar code must be scanned to switch between the rule sets. For example, in the case of the “sale” rule above, the rule programmer wants the cashier to scan the bar code “M” before a sale. To do this, a rule can be entered as follows: When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “M”, select rule set number 1. Another rule could be programmed to switch back. When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “N”, turn off rule set number 1. The switching back to normal rules can also be done in the “sale” rule. For example, the rule may look like this: When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, turn off rule set 1. It is recommended that you scan the Disable All Rule Sets bar code on page 14-9 after programming a rule belonging to an alternate rule set. In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules, you can enable or disable them by scanning the appropriate bar codes beginning on page 14-9.

14-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes)
The order of programming individual rules is important.The most general rule should be programmed last. All programmed rules are stored in a buffer. As they are programmed, they are stored at the “top” of a rules list. If three rules have been created, the list would be configured as follows: Third Rule Second Rule First Rule When data is scanned, the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria match (and therefore, if the actions should occur). Input is modified into the data format specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds. Be sure that your most general rule is the last one programmed. For example, if the THIRD rule states: When scanning a bar code of any length, send all data, then send the ENTER key. And the SECOND rule states: When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12, send the first four characters, then send the ENTER key, then send all remaining data. If a Code 128 bar code of length 12 were scanned, the THIRD rule would be in effect. The SECOND rule would appear to not function. Note also that ADF rules are actually created when you use the standard data editing functions. Scan options are entered as ADF rules, and the hierarchy mentioned above also applies to them. For the LS2108, this applies to prefix/suffix programming in the parameter Scan Data Transmission Format. These rules reside in the same “rule list” as ADF Rules, so the order of their creation is also important.

Default Rules
Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data. Units with custom software may have one or more default rules burned in. The rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules first, then the default rules. Default rules can be disabled by entering the following general rule in the user programmable buffer: When receiving scan data, send all data. Since this rule always applies, ADF will never go into the default rules.

Special Considerations for Multipoint Networks
ADF rules scanned by an individual scanner are NOT broadcast to other scanners in the piconet, as are other parameters; however, ADF rules that 123Scan generates ARE broadcast to all scanners in the piconet. 123Scan rules transmitted from the base are stored at the BEGINNING of the ADF rule buffer, regardless of the presence of existing rules, while rules scanned by the scanner are appended to the existing buffer. For this reason, transmit rules to be shared by all scanners from 123Scan FIRST. Then, scan rules to customize an individual scanner after 123Scan rules are transferred.

Advanced Data Formatting 14-7

Special Commands
Pause Duration
This parameter along with the Send Pause parameter on page 14-24 allows a pause to be inserted in the data transmission. Pauses are set by scanning a two-digit number (i.e., two bar codes), and are measured in 0.1 second intervals. For example, scanning bar codes “0” and “1” inserts a 0.1 second pause; “0” and “5” gives a 0.5 second delay. Numeric bar codes begin on page D-3 in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4.

Pause Duration

Begin New Rule
Scan this bar code to start entering a new rule

Begin New Rule

Save Rule
Scan this bar code to save the entered rule.

Save Rule

14-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Erase
Use these bar codes to erase criteria, actions, or rules.

Erase Criteria And Start Again

Erase Actions And Start Again

Erase Previously Saved Rule

Erase All Rules

Quit Entering Rules
Scan this bar code to quit entering rules.

Quit Entering Rules

Advanced Data Formatting 14-9

Disable Rule Set
Use these bar codes to disable rule sets.

Disable Rule Set 1

Disable Rule Set 2

Disable Rule Set 3

Disable Rule Set 4

Disable All Rule Sets

14-10

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Criteria
Code Types
Select any number of code types to be affected. All selected codes must be scanned in succession, prior to selecting other criteria. If a code type is not selected, all code types are affected. Scan the bar codes for all code types desired before selecting other criteria.

Code 39

Codabar

RSS 14

RSS Limited

RSS Expanded

Code 128

Advanced Data Formatting 14-11

Code Types (continued)

D 2 OF 5

IATA 2 OF 5

I 2 OF 5

Code 93

UPC-A

UPC-E

EAN-8

EAN-13

14-12

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Code Types (continued)

MSI

UCC/EAN 128

UPC-E1

Bookland EAN

Trioptic Code 39

Code 11

Advanced Data Formatting 14-13

Code Lengths
Define the number of characters the selected code type must contain. If a code length is not selected, selected code types of any length are affected. Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code types must contain. Select one length per rule only.

1 Character

2 Characters

3 Characters

4 Characters

5 Characters

6 Characters

7 Characters

14-14

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Code Lengths (continued)

8 Characters

9Characters

10 Characters

11Characters

12 Characters

13Characters

14 Characters

Advanced Data Formatting 14-15

Code Lengths (continued)

15 Characters

16 Characters

17 Characters

18 Characters

19 Characters

20 Characters

21 Characters

22 Characters

14-16

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Code Lengths (continued)

23 Characters

24 Characters

25 Characters

26 Characters

27 Characters

28 Characters

29 Characters

30 Characters

Advanced Data Formatting 14-17

Message Containing A Specific Data String
Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific character or data string, or contains a specific character or data string. There are 4 features: • • • • Specific String at Start Specific String, Any Location Any Message OK Rule Belongs to Set

Specific String at Start
Scan this bar code, then scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) in the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14-77. After scanning the following bar code: 1. Enter a string using the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 14-77. 2. Scan End of Message on page 14-85.

Specific String At Start

Specific String, Any Location
Scan this bar code, then, using the Numeric Keypad on page 14-18, scan a two-digit number representing the position (use a leading “zero” if necessary). Then scan the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) on the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14-77, followed by the End of Message bar code on page 14-85. After scanning the following bar code: 1. Enter a location using the “Numeric Keypad” on page 14-18. 2. Enter a string using the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 14-77. 3. Scan End of Message on page 14-85.

Specific String Any Location

Any Message OK
By not scanning any bar code, all selected code types are formatted, regardless of information contained.

14-18

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Numeric Keypad
Bar codes on this page should not be confused with those on the alphanumeric keyboard.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Advanced Data Formatting 14-19

Numeric Keypad (continued)

8

9

Cancel

Rule Belongs To Set
Select the set a rule belongs to. (There are four possible rule sets.) See Alternate Rule Sets on page 14-5 for more information about rule sets. Scan a bar code below to select which set a rule belongs to.

Rule Belongs To Set 1

Rule Belongs To Set 2

Rule Belongs To Set 3

Rule Belongs To Set 4

14-20

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Actions
Select how to format the data for transmission.

Send Data
Send all data that remains, send all data up to a specific character selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14-77, or send the next N characters. N = any number from 1 to 254, selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard. Use these bar codes to send data.

Send Data Up To Character

Send All Data That Remains

Send Next Character

Send Next 2 Characters

Send Next 3 Characters

Send Next 4 Characters

Send Next 5 Characters

Advanced Data Formatting 14-21

Send Data (continued)

Send Next 6 Characters

Send Next 7 Characters

Send Next 8 Characters

Send Next 9 Characters

Send Next 10 Characters

Send Next 11 Characters

Send Next 12 Characters

Send Next 13 Characters

14-22

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Data (continued)

Send Next 14 Characters

Send Next 15 Characters

Send Next 16 Characters

Send Next 17 Characters

Send Next 18 Characters

Send Next 19 Characters

Send Next 20 Characters

Advanced Data Formatting 14-23

Setup Field(s)
Table 14-1. Setup Field(s) Definitions
Parameter Move Cursor Move Cursor to a Character Scan the Move Cursor To Character bar code on page 14-24, 14-24 then any printable ASCII character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard. When this is used, the cursor moves to the position after the matching character. If the character is not there, the rule fails and ADF tries the next rule. Scan this bar code to move cursor to the beginning of the data. 14-24 Description Page

Move Cursor to Start of Data Move Cursor Past a Character

This parameter moves the cursor past all sequential occurrences 14-24 of a selected character. For example, if the selected character is ‘A,’ then the cursor moves past ‘A,’ ‘AA,’ ‘AAA,’ etc. Scan the Move Cursor Past Character bar code on page 14-24, then select a character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard. If the character is not there, the cursor does not move (i.e., has no effect). Scan one of these bar codes to select the desired number of positions to move the cursor ahead. Scan one of these bar codes to select the desired number of positions to move the cursor back. Send prefix and/or suffix value by scanning the appropriate bar code. These values must be set using the Scan Prefix and Scan Suffix bar codes on page 13-6. 14-24 14-26 14-27

Skip Ahead “N” Characters Skip Back “N” Characters Send Preset Value

14-24

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Move Cursor
Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character. Then enter a character by scanning a bar code from the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 14-77. If there is no match when the rule is interpreted and the rule fails, the next rule is checked.

Move Cursor To Character

Move Cursor To Start

Move Cursor Past Character

Send Pause
Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data. The length of this pause is controlled by the value of the Pause Duration parameter.

Send Pause

Skip Ahead
Use the following bar codes to skip ahead characters.

Skip Ahead 1 Character

Skip Ahead 2 Characters

Advanced Data Formatting 14-25

Skip Ahead (continued)

Skip Ahead 3 Characters

Skip Ahead 4 Characters

Skip Ahead 5 Characters

Skip Ahead 6 Characters

Skip Ahead 7 Characters

Skip Ahead 8 Characters

Skip Ahead 9 Characters

Skip Ahead 10 Characters

14-26

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Skip Back
Use the following bar codes to skip back characters.

Skip Back 1 Character

Skip Back 2 Characters

Skip Back 3 Characters

Skip Back 4 Characters

Skip Back 5 Characters

Skip Back 6 Characters

Skip Back 7 Characters

Advanced Data Formatting 14-27

Skip Back (continued)

Skip Back 8 Characters

Skip Back 9 Characters

Skip Back 10 Characters

Send Preset Value
Use these bar codes to send preset values. These values must be set using the Scan Prefix and Scan Suffix bar codes on page 13-6.

Send Prefix

Send Suffix

14-28

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Modify Data
Modify data in the ways listed. The following actions work for all send commands that follow it within a rule. If pad zeros to length 6, send next 3 characters, stop padding, send next 5 characters is programmed, three zeros are added to the first send, and the next send is unaffected by the padding. These options do not apply to the Send Keystroke or Send Preset Value options.

Remove All Spaces
To remove all spaces in the send commands that follow, scan this bar code.

Remove All Spaces

Crunch All Spaces
To leave one space between words, scan this bar code. This also removes all leading and trailing spaces.

Crunch All Spaces

Stop Space Removal
Scan this bar code to disable space removal.

Stop Space Removal

Remove Leading Zeros
Scan this bar code to remove all leading zeros.

Remove Leading Zeros

Stop Zero Removal
Scan this bar code to disable the removal of zeros.

Stop Zero Removal

Advanced Data Formatting 14-29

Pad Data with Spaces
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces. This parameter is activated by Send commands.

Pad Spaces To Length 1

Pad Spaces To Length 2

Pad Spaces To Length 3

Pad Spaces To Length 4

Pad Spaces To Length 5

Pad Spaces To Length 6

Pad Spaces To Length 7

Pad Spaces To Length 8

14-30

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Pad Data with Spaces (continued)

Pad Spaces To Length 9

Pad Spaces To Length 10

Pad Spaces To Length 11

Pad Spaces To Length 12

Pad Spaces To Length 13

Pad Spaces To Length 14

Pad Spaces To Length 15

Pad Spaces To Length 16

Advanced Data Formatting 14-31

Pad Data with Spaces (continued)

Pad Spaces To Length 17

Pad Spaces To Length 18

Pad Spaces To Length 19

Pad Spaces To Length 20

Pad Spaces To Length 21

Pad Spaces To Length 22

Pad Spaces To Length 23

14-32

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Pad Data with Spaces (continued)

Pad Spaces To Length 24

Pad Spaces To Length 25

Pad Spaces To Length 26

Pad Spaces To Length 27

Pad Spaces To Length 28

Pad Spaces To Length 29

Pad Spaces To Length 30

Stop Pad Spaces

Advanced Data Formatting 14-33

Pad Data with Zeros
To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros. This parameter is activated by Send commands.

Pad Zeros To Length 1

Pad Zeros To Length 2

Pad Zeros To Length 3

Pad Zeros To Length 4

Pad Zeros To Length 5

Pad Zeros To Length 6

Pad Zeros To Length 7

Pad Zeros To Length 8

14-34

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Pad Data with Zeros (continued)

Pad Zeros To Length 9

Pad Zeros To Length 10

Pad Zeros To Length 11

Pad Zeros To Length 12

Pad Zeros To Length 13

Pad Zeros To Length 14

Pad Zeros To Length 15

Pad Zeros To Length 16

Advanced Data Formatting 14-35

Pad Data with Zeros (continued)

Pad Zeros To Length 17

Pad Zeros To Length 18

Pad Zeros To Length 19

Pad Zeros To Length 20

Pad Zeros To Length 21

Pad Zeros To Length 22

Pad Zeros To Length 23

Pad Zeros To Length 24

14-36

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Pad Data with Zeros (continued)

Pad Zeros To Length 25

Pad Zeros To Length 26

Pad Zeros To Length 27

Pad Zeros To Length 28

Pad Zeros To Length 29

Pad Zeros To Length 30

Stop Pad Zeros

Advanced Data Formatting 14-37

Beeps
Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule.

Beep Once

Beep Twice

Beep Three Times

14-38

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)
Control Characters
Scan the “Send __” bar code for the desired keystroke

Send Control 2

Send Control A

Send Control B

Send Control C

Send Control D

Send Control E

Send Control F

Send Control G

Advanced Data Formatting 14-39

Control Characters (continued)

Send Control H

Send Control I

Send Control J

Send Control K

Send Control L

Send Control M

Send Control N

Send Control O

14-40

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Control Characters (continued)

Send Control P

Send Control Q

Send Control R

Send Control S

Send Control T

Send Control U

Send Control V

Send Control W

Advanced Data Formatting 14-41

Control Characters (continued)

Send Control X

Send Control Y

Send Control Z

Send Control [

Send Control \

Send Control ]

Send Control 6

Send Control -

14-42

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Characters
Scan the “Send __” bar code for the desired keyboard characters

Send Space

Send !

Send “

Send #

Send $

Send %

Send &

Send ‘

Advanced Data Formatting 14-43

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send (

Send )

Send *

Send +

Send ,

Send -

Send .

Send /

14-44

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send 0

Send 1

Send 2

Send 3

Send 4

Send 5

Send 6

Send 7

Advanced Data Formatting 14-45

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send 8

Send 9

Send :

Send ;

Send <

Send =

Send >

Send ?

14-46

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send @

Send A

Send B

Send C

Send D

Send E

Send F

Send G

Advanced Data Formatting 14-47

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send H

Send I

Send J

Send K

Send L

Send M

Send N

Send O

14-48

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send P

Send Q

Send R

Send S

Send T

Send U

Send V

Send W

Advanced Data Formatting 14-49

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send X

Send Y

Send Z

Send [

Send \

Send ]

Send ^

Send _

14-50

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send `

Send a

Send b

Send c

Send d

Send e

Send f

Send g

Advanced Data Formatting 14-51

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send h

Send i

Send j

Send k

Send l

Send m

Send n

Send o

14-52

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send p

Send q

Send r

Send s

Send t

Send u

Send v

Send w

Advanced Data Formatting 14-53

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send x

Send y

Send z

Send {

Send |

Send }

Send ~

14-54

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send ALT Characters

Send Alt 2

Send Alt A

Send Alt B

Send Alt C

Send Alt D

Send Alt E

Send Alt F

Send Alt G

Advanced Data Formatting 14-55

Send ALT Characters (continued)

Send Alt H

Send Alt I

Send Alt J

Send Alt K

Send Alt L

Send Alt M

Send Alt N

Send Alt O

14-56

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send ALT Characters (continued)

Send Alt P

Send Alt Q

Send Alt R

Send Alt S

Send Alt T

Send Alt U

Send Alt V

Send Alt W

Advanced Data Formatting 14-57

Send ALT Characters (continued)

Send Alt X

Send Alt Y

Send Alt Z

Send Alt [

Send Alt \

Send Alt ]

Send Alt 6

Send Alt -

14-58

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Keypad Characters

Send Keypad *

Send Keypad +

Send Keypad -

Send Keypad .

Send Keypad /

Send Keypad 0

Send Keypad 1

Send Keypad 2

Advanced Data Formatting 14-59

Send Keypad Characters (continued)

Send Keypad 3

Send Keypad 4

Send Keypad 5

Send Keypad 6

Send Keypad 7

Send Keypad 8

Send Keypad 9

Send Keypad Enter

14-60

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Keypad Characters (continued)

Send Keypad Numlock NUM LOCK

Send Break Key

Send Delete Key

Send Page Up Key

Send End Key

Send Page Down Key

Send Pause Key

Send Scroll Lock Key

Advanced Data Formatting 14-61

Send Keypad Characters (continued)

Send Backspace Key

Send Tab Key

Send Print Screen Key

Send Insert Key

Send Home Key

Send Enter Key

Send Escape Key

Send Up Arrow Key

14-62

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Keypad Characters (continued)

Send Down Arrow Key

Send Left Arrow Key

Send Right Arrow Key

Advanced Data Formatting 14-63

Send Function Key

Send F1 Key

Send F2 Key

Send F3 Key

Send F4 Key

Send F5 Key

Send F6 Key

14-64

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Function Key (continued)

Send F7 Key

Send F8 Key

Send F9 Key

Send F10 Key

Send F11 Key

Send F12 Key

Send F13 Key

Send F14 Key

Advanced Data Formatting 14-65

Send Function Key (continued)

Send F15 Key

Send F16 Key

Send F17 Key

Send F18 Key

Send F19 Key

Send F20 Key

Send F21 Key

Send F22 Key

14-66

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Function Key (continued)

Send F23 Key

Send F24 Key

Send PF1 Key

Send PF2 Key

Send PF3 Key

Send PF4 Key

Send PF5 Key

Send PF6 Key

Advanced Data Formatting 14-67

Send Function Key (continued)

Send PF7 Key

Send PF8 Key

Send PF9 Key

Send PF10 Key

Send PF11 Key

Send PF12 Key

Send PF13 Key

Send PF14 Key

14-68

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Function Key (continued)

Send PF15 Key

Send PF16 Key

Send PF17 Key

Send PF18 Key

Send PF19 Key

Send PF20 Key

Send PF21 Key

Send PF22 Key

Advanced Data Formatting 14-69

Send Function Key (continued)

Send PF23 Key

Send PF24 Key

Send PF25 Key

Send PF26 Key

Send PF27 Key

Send PF28 Key

Send PF29 Key

Send PF30 Key

14-70

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Right Control Key
The “Send Right Control Key” action sends a tap (press and release) of the Right Control Key.

Send Right Control Key

Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters
The “Send Graphic User Interface Character” actions tap the specified key while holding the System Dependent Graphic User Interface (GUI) Key. The definition of the Graphic User Interface key is dependent upon the attached system:

Send GUI 0

Send GUI 1

Send GUI 2

Send GUI 3

Send GUI 4

Send GUI 5

Advanced Data Formatting 14-71

Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)

Send GUI 6

Send GUI 7

Send GUI 8

Send GUI 9

Send GUI A

Send GUI B

Send GUI C

14-72

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)

Send GUI D

Send GUI E

Send GUI F

Send GUI G

Send GUI H

Send GUI I

Send GUI J

Advanced Data Formatting 14-73

Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)

Send GUI K

Send GUI L

Send GUI M

Send GUI N

Send GUI O

Send GUI P

Send GUI Q

14-74

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)

Send GUI R

Send GUI S

Send GUI T

Send GUI U

Send GUI V

Send GUI W

Send GUI X

Advanced Data Formatting 14-75

Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued)

Send GUI Y

Send GUI Z

14-76

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Turn On/Off Rule Sets
Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off.

Turn On Rule Set 1

Turn On Rule Set 2

Turn On Rule Set 3

Turn On Rule Set 4

Turn Off Rule Set 1

Turn Off Rule Set 2

Turn Off Rule Set 3

Turn Off Rule Set 4

Advanced Data Formatting 14-77

Alphanumeric Keyboard

Space

#

$

%

*

+

(Dash)

.

14-78

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

/

!

“

&

“

(

)

Advanced Data Formatting 14-79

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

:

;

<

=

>

?

@

14-80

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

[

\

]

^

_ (Underscore)

`

Advanced Data Formatting 14-81

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)
Bar codes on this page should not be confused with those on the numeric keypad.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

14-82

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

Advanced Data Formatting 14-83

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

14-84

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

Advanced Data Formatting 14-85

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

Cancel

End of Message

14-86

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

Advanced Data Formatting 14-87

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

14-88

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

Advanced Data Formatting 14-89

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

~

14-90

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Standard Default Parameters

Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table
Parameter User Preferences Set Default Parameter Beeper Tone Beeper Volume Power Mode Scan Pattern Scan Line Width Laser On Time Beep After Good Decode Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles1 5-5 Restore Defaults Medium High Continuous On Multi-line Always Raster Full Width 3.0 Sec Enable Default Page Number

4-5 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8 4-9

1User

selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

A-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Country Types (Country Codes) Ignore Unknown Characters Keystroke Delay Intra-Keystroke Delay Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Caps Lock On Caps Lock Override Convert Wedge Data Function Key Mapping FN1 Substitution Send and Make Break RS-232 Host Parameters RS-232 Host Types Baud Rate Parity Type Stop Bit Select Data Bits (ASCII Format) Check Receive Errors Hardware Handshaking Software Handshaking Host Serial Response Time-out RTS Line State Beep on Intercharacter Delay Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Ignore Unknown Characters
1User

Default North American Send No Delay Disable Disable Disable Disable No Convert Disable Disable Send

Page Number 5-3 5-3 5-8 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-10 5-10 5-11 5-11

Standard 9600 None 1 Stop Bit 8-Bit Enable None None 2 Sec Low RTS Disable 0 msec Normal Operation Send Bar Code

6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-10 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-17

selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

Standard Default Parameters A-3

Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter USB Host Parameters USB Device Type USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) USB Keystroke Delay USB CAPS Lock Override USB Ignore Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad USB FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters Port Address Convert Unknown to Code 39 Ignore Beep Ignore Bar Code Configuration Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1 80 msec Bar High/Margin Low Send Disable Disable 9-5 None Selected Disable Disable Disable 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-7 HID Keyboard Emulation North American No Delay Disable Send Disable Disable Disable Disable No Case Conversion 7-5 7-6 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-11 Default Page Number

Leading Margin Polarity Ignore Unknown Characters Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Scanner Emulation Beep Style Parameter Pass-Through

9-6 9-7 9-7 9-8 9-9

Beep on Successful Transmit Parameter Process and Pass Through

10-5 10-6

1User

selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

A-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Convert Newer Code Types Module Width Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Default Convert Newer Code Types 20 µs Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 3 Sec Ignore Unknown Characters 2 ms Check for Decode LED Page Number 10-6 10-7 10-7

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Transmission Timeout Ignore Unknown Characters Leading Margin Check for Decode LED 123Scan Configuration Tool 123Scan Configuration UPC/EAN UPC-A UPC-E UPC-E1 EAN-8/JAN 8 EAN-13/JAN 13 Bookland EAN Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit UPC-A Preamble UPC-E Preamble UPC-E1 Preamble Convert UPC-E to A Convert UPC-E1 to A
1User

10-7 10-8 10-9 10-9 10-10

None1

11-3

Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable Ignore 7 Enable Enable Enable System Character System Character System Character Disable Disable

12-7 12-7 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-9 12-10 12-10 12-13 12-13 12-14 12-14 12-15 12-16 12-16 12-17

selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

Standard Default Parameters

A-5

Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Bookland ISBN Format UCC Coupon Extended Code Code 128 Code 128 UCC/EAN-128 ISBT 128 (non-concatenated) Code 39 Code 39 Trioptic Code 39 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Code 32 Prefix Set Length(s) for Code 39 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Buffer Code 39 Code 93 Code 93 Set Length(s) for Code 93 Code 11 Code 11 Set Lengths for Code 11 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
1User

Default Disable ISBN-10 Disable

Page Number 12-17 12-18 12-18

Enable Enable Enable

12-19 12-19 12-20

Enable Disable Disable Disable 2 to 55 Disable Disable Disable Disable

12-21 12-21 12-22 12-22 12-23 12-23 12-24 12-25 12-26

Disable 4 to 55

12-29 12-29

Disable 4 to 55 Disable Disable

12-31 12-31 12-33 12-33

Enable

12-34

selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

A-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) Discrete 2 of 5 Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Codabar (NW - 7) Codabar Set Lengths for Codabar CLSI Editing NOTIS Editing MSI MSI Set Length(s) for MSI MSI Check Digits Transmit MSI Check Digit MSI Check Digit Algorithm RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded Convert RSS to UPC/EAN Symbology - Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level
1User

Default 14 Disable Disable Disable

Page Number 12-34 12-35 12-36 12-36

Disable 12

12-37 12-37

Disable

12-39

Disable 5 to 55 Disable Disable

12-40 12-40 12-41 12-42

Disable 2 to 55 One Disable Mod 10/Mod 10

12-43 12-43 12-44 12-45 12-45

Disable Disable Disable Disable

12-46 12-46 12-46 12-47

1

12-49

selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

Standard Default Parameters A-7

Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
Parameter Security Levels Bi-directional Redundancy Intercharacter Gap Report Version Report MIMIC Version Report Synapse Cable Miscellaneous Scanner Options Transmit Code ID Character Prefix Value Suffix Value Scan Data Transmission Format FN1 Substitution Values Transmit “No Read” Message Synapse Interface
1User

Default 0 Disable Normal Intercharacter Gap

Page Number 12-50 12-51 12-51 12-52 12-52 12-52

None 7013 7013 Data As Is Set Disable Standard

13-5 13-5 13-5 13-7 13-8 13-8 13-9

selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.

A-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 AIM Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4

B-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Programming Reference B-3

Symbol Code Identifiers
Table B-1. Symbol Code Characters
Code Character A B C D E F G H J K L M N R UPC/EAN Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32 Codabar Code 128, ISBT 128 Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA Code 11 MSI UCC/EAN-128 Bookland EAN Trioptic Code 39 Coupon Code RSS Family Code Type

B-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

AIM Code Identifiers
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where: ] = Flag Character (ASCII 93) c = Code Character (see Table B-2) m = Modifier Character (see Table B-3)

Table B-2. Aim Code Characters
Code Character A C E e F G H I M S X Code Type Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32 Code 128 (all variants), Coupon (Code 128 portion) UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion) RSS Family Codabar Code 93 Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 MSI D2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5 Bookland EAN, Code 39 Trioptic

The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B-3.

Table B-3. Modifier Characters
Code Type Code 39 Option Value 0 1 3 4 5 7 Option No check character or Full ASCII processing. Reader has checked one check character. Reader has checked and stripped check character. Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion. Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character. Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character.

Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as ]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4). Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356

Programming Reference B-5

Table B-3. Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type Code 128 Option Value 0 1 2 Option Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position. Function code 1 in first symbol character position.

]C1AIMID
I 2 of 5

Function code 1 in second symbol character position. Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position, AIMID is transmitted as 0 1 3 No check digit processing. Reader has validated check digit. Reader has validated and stripped check digit.

Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123 Codabar 0 1 3 No check digit processing. Reader has checked check digit. Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.

Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123 Code 93 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905 MSI 0 1 Check digits are sent. No check digit is sent.

Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as ]M14123 D 2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123 UPC/EAN 0 1 2 4 Standard packet in full EAN country code format, which is 13 digits for UPCA and UPC-E (not including supplemental data). Two-digit supplement data only. Five-digit supplement data only. EAN-8 data packet.

Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905 Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X Code 11 0 1 3 RSS Family Single check digit Two check digits Check characters validated but not transmitted. No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. RSS-14 and RSS-Limited transmit with an Application Identifier “01”.Note: In UCC/EAN-128 emulation mode, RSS is transmitted using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1). Example: An RSS-14 bar code 100123456788902 is transmitted as ]e001100123456788902.

B-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Sample Bar Codes
Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3 UPC-A, 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3 EAN-13, 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4 RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4 RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4 RSS-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

C-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Sample Bar Codes

C-3

Code 39

123ABC

UPC/EAN UPC-A, 100%

0

12345 67890

5

EAN-13, 100%

3 4 5 67 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 0

Code 128

12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234

C-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Interleaved 2 of 5

12345678901231

RSS
RSS variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below (see RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) on page 1246).

RSS

10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523 (RSS Expanded Stacked)

1234890hjio9900mnb (RSS Expanded)

08672345650916 (RSS Limited)

Sample Bar Codes

C-5

RSS-14

55432198673467 (RSS-14 Truncated)

90876523412674 (RSS-14 Stacked)

78123465709811 (RSS-14 Stacked Omni-Directional)

C-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Numeric Bar Codes
Numeric Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 Cancel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

D-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Numeric Bar Codes

D-3

Numeric Bar Codes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).

0

1

2

3

4

5

D-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Numeric Bar Codes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).

6

7

8

9

Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below.

Cancel

ASCII Character Sets

Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table
ASCII Value 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character %U $A $B $C $D $E $F $G $H $I $J $K $L Keystroke CTRL 2 CTRL A CTRL B CTRL C CTRL D CTRL E CTRL F CTRL G CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1 CTRL J CTRL K CTRL L

E-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
ASCII Value 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character $M $N $O $P $Q $R $S $T $U $V $W $X $Y $Z %A %B %C %D %E Space /A /B /C /D /E /F /G /H Keystroke CTRL M/ENTER1 CTRL N CTRL O CTRL P CTRL Q CTRL R CTRL S CTRL T CTRL U CTRL V CTRL W CTRL X CTRL Y CTRL Z CTRL [ CTRL \ CTRL ] CTRL 6 CTRL Space ! “ # ? % & ‘ (

ASCII Character Sets E-3

Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
ASCII Value 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character /I /J /K /L . /o 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 /Z %F %G %H %I %J %V A B C D Keystroke ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? @ A B C D

E-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
ASCII Value 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z %K %L %M %N %O %W Keystroke E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ ‘

ASCII Character Sets E-5

Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
ASCII Value 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character +A +B +C +D +E +F +G +H +I +J +K +L +M +N +O +P +Q +R +S +T +U +V +W +X +Y +Z %P %Q Keystroke a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { I

E-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)
ASCII Value 1125 1126 Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character %R %S Keystroke } ~

The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.

Table E-2. ALT Key Standard Default Tables
ALT Keys 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 Keystroke ALT 2 ALT A ALT B ALT C ALT D ALT E ALT F ALT G ALT H ALT I ALT J ALT K ALT L ALT M ALT N ALT O ALT P ALT Q ALT R ALT S ALT T ALT U ALT V ALT W ALT X ALT Y ALT Z

ASCII Character Sets E-7

Table E-3. Misc. Key Standard Default Table
Misc. Key 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 Keystroke PA 1 PA 2 CMD 1 CMD 2 CMD 3 CMD 4 CMD 5 CMD 6 CMD 7 CMD 8 CMD 9 CMD 10 CMD 11 CMD 12 CMD 13 CMD 14

Table E-4. GUI Shift Keys
GUI Shift Keys The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

Other Value 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3065 3066 3067

Keystroke GUI 0 GUI 1 GUI 2 GUI 3 GUI 4 GUI 5 GUI 6 GUI 7 GUI 8 GUI 9 GUI A GUI B GUI C

E-8

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table E-4. GUI Shift Keys (Continued)
3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 GUI D GUI E GUI F GUI G GUI H GUI I GUI J GUI K GUI L GUI M GUI N GUI O GUI P GUI Q GUI R GUI S GUI T GUI U GUI V GUI W GUI X GUI Y GUI Z

Table E-5. PF Key Standard Default Table
PF Keys 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 Keystroke PF 1 PF 2 PF 3 PF 4 PF 5 PF 6 PF 7 PF 8 PF 9

ASCII Character Sets E-9

Table E-5. PF Key Standard Default Table (Continued)
PF Keys 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 Keystroke PF 10 PF 11 PF 12 PF 13 PF 14 PF 15 PF 16

Table E-6. F key Standard Default Table
F Keys 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 Keystroke F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F 10 F 11 F 12 F 13 F 14 F 15 F 16 F 17 F 18 F 19 F 20 F 21 F 22 F 23 F 24

E-10

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Table E-7. Numeric Key Standard Default Table
Numeric Keypad 6042 6043 6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 Keystroke * + Undefined . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Enter Num Lock

Table E-8. Extended Keypad Standard Default Table
Extended Keypad 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 Keystroke Break Delete Pg Up End Pg Dn Pause Scroll Lock Backspace Tab Print Screen Insert Home

ASCII Character Sets E-11

Table E-8. Extended Keypad Standard Default Table (Continued)
Extended Keypad 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 Keystroke Enter Escape Up Arrow Dn Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow

E-12

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Index
Numerics
123Scan configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3 send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42 send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58 send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 send value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 skip ahead "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 skip back "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28 special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 specific string any location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 any message ok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 rule belongs to set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 transmit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3 turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-76 zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28 advanced data formatting . . . . 2-4, 3-3, 9-8, 11-3, 14-3 actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-20 alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-77 alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37 code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-10 default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18 pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29

A actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-20 move cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-24 send data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20 setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-77 alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-37 code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13 code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10 criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-10 default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 invalid rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 move cursor past a character . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 move cursor to a character . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 move cursor to start of data . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18 pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-29 pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8, 11-3, 14-3 rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-54 send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38 send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-63

IN-2

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-54 send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38 send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-63 send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-42 send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-58 send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-27 setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-24 skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-26 space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-28 special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17 turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-76 zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-28 aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 ASCII values keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 standard defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 assembling the stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

B bar code defaults all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 bar codes 123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3 beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 data options pause duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 IBM 468X/469X convert unkown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 ignore bar code configuration . . . . . . . . .8-7 ignore beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 keyboard wedge alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . .5-9 caps lock on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 capsl ock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 country keyboard types (country codes) .5-6 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8

keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 miscellaneous FN1 sub values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 scan data transmission format . . . . . . . 13-6 synapse interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 transmit code ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 transmit no read msg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 report mimic version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 report synapse cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 report version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 RS-232 baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 beep on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 host serial response time-out . . . . . . . . 6-14 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 ignore unkown characters . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Nixdorf Beep/LED options . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 scan line width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 scan patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 symbologies bi-directional redundancy . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 bookland EAN, enable/disable . . . . . . . 12-9 Chinese 2 of 5, enable/disable . . . . . . 12-39 codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41 codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42 codabar, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 code 11 check digit verification . . . . . 12-33 code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31 code 11, transmit check digits . . . . . . 12-33 code 128, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 code 39 transmit buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27 code 39 buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25 code 39 check digit verification . . . . . 12-24 code 39 full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . 12-25 code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 code 39 transmit check digit . . . . . . . 12-24 code 39, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21 code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 code 93, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 discrete 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37 discrete 2 of 5, enable/disable . . . . . . 12-37 EAN-13/EAN-8, enable/disable . . . . . . 12-8

Index IN-3

EAN-8/JAN-8 extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . . . . . 12-35 I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . 12-36 I 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . 12-36 I 2 of 5, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 intercharacter gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 ISBT 128, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-44 MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 MSI transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 MSI, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 redundancy levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48 RSS, convert to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . 12-47 RSS, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46 security levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 bi-directional redundancy . . . . . 12-51 supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 trioptic code 39, enable/disable . . . . . 12-21 UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . 12-18 UCC/EAN-128, enable/disable . . . . . . 12-19 UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 UPC-A transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . 12-13 UPC-A/UPC-E, enable/disable . . . . . . . 12-7 UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 UPC-E transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . 12-13 UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 UPC-E1 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . 12-14 UPC-E1, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 UPC/EAN/JAN supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 USB caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 country keyboard types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 wand emulation code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 convert all bar codes to code 39 . . . . . . . 9-8 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 leading margin (quiet zone) . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 beeper definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

code 93 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 code identifiers AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4 Symbol code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3 customer interaction center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

D decode zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 default parameters all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 standard default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 discrete 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 DTF bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37

E error indications ack/nak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3 beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 enq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-4 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3 laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 miscellaneous scanner options . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3 RS-232 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-5, 3-3, 6-14 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 6-17, 7-9 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 xon/xoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13

H host types IBM (port address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7 scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

C cables installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 removing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 6-18, 7-12, E-1 Chinese 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39 codabar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 code 11 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31 code 128 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 code 39 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21

I
IBM 468X/469X connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 IBM 468X/469X parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 IBM defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-9 intercharacter gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-51

IN-4

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34

K keyboard wedge connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 keyboard wedge defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 keyboard wedge parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5

report mimic version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 report synapse cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 report version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 RS-232 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 RS-232 defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 RS-232 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 RSS bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46

L
LED definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

S sample bar codes code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 scan patterns multi-line rastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 4-7 single line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 4-7 scanner emulation defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 scanner parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 scanning aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7, 7-9 hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9 miscellaneous scanner options sequence example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 symbologies sequence example . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 user preferences sequence example . . . . . . . . 4-3 security level bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48 bi-directional redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi setup connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 connecting interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 connecting keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . 5-3 connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 connecting to an IBM 468X/469X host . . . . . . 8-3 connecting using wand emulation . . . . .9-3, 10-3 installing the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 synapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 stand assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 standard default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 symbologies defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 synapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52

M maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 miscellaneous defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 MSI bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43

N notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv NW - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40

P parameter defaults all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 parameters IBM 468X/469X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 miscellaneous scanner options . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 pinouts scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 power supply connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 programming bar codes UPC/EAN bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-18

Q quiet zone (leading margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6

T technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

R rastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 4-7

Index IN-5

U unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 UPC/EAN bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 USB defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 USB parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 user preferences bar codes beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 scan line width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 scan patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 user preferences defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 user preferences parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

W wand emulation connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 10-3 wand emulation defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 wand emulation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

IN-6

LS4208 Product Reference Guide

Symbol Technologies, Inc. One Symbol Plaza Holtsville, New York 11742-1300 http://www.symbol.com

72E-69413-03 Revision A - January 2007